FTDX5000 Series Operating Manual

FTDX5000 Series Operating Manual
HF/50 MHz Transceiver
FTDX5000
Series
Operating Manual
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
Tennozu Parkside Building
2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 140-0002 Japan
YAESU USA
6125 Phyllis Drive, Cypress, CA 90630, U.S.A.
YAESU UK
Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
YAESU HK
Unit 2002, 20/F, 9 Chong Yip Street,
Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
About This Manual . . .
The FTDX5000 is a leading-edge transceiver with a number of new and exciting features, some of which may be unfamiliar to you. In order to gain the most enjoyment and operating efficiency from your FTDX5000, we recommend that
you read this manual in its entirety, and keep it handy for reference as you explore the many capabilities of your new
transceiver.
This operating manual is the common manual to the FTDX5000, FTDX5000D, and FTDX5000MP. Before using your
FTDX5000, be sure to read and follow the instructions in the “Before You Begin” section of this manual.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Congratulations on your purchase of the FTDX5000 Yaesu
amateur transceiver!
Whether this is your first rig, or Yaesu equipment is already
the backbone of your station, rest assured this transceiver
will provide many hours of operating pleasure for years to
come.
The FTDX5000 is an elite-class HF transceiver and will provide exceptional transmit and receive performance. The
FTDX5000 is designed for the most competitive operating
situations, whether you operate in contests, DX, or digitalmode environments.
Built on the foundation of the popular FTDX9000 transceiver,
and carrying on the proud tradition of the FT-1000 series,
the FTDX5000 provides up to 200 Watts of power output on
SSB, CW, and FM (50 Watts AM carrier). Digital Signal Processing (DSP) is utilized throughout the design, providing
leading edge performance on both transmit and receive.
Available as an option, the DMU-2000 Data Management
Unit will provide extensive display capabilities via a usersupplied computer monitor: Band Scope, Audio Scope, X-Y
Oscilloscope, World Clock, Rotator Control, extensive transceiver status displays, and station logging capability.
The Yaesu-exclusive VRF (Variable RF Front-End Filter)
provides exceptional protection from strong nearby signals,
and serves as a high-performance Preselector, ideal for multioperator contest environments. The filter is manually tuned,
allowing the operator to optimize sensitivity or signal rejection with the turn of a knob. For the ultimate in receiver RF
selectivity, the optional RF μ-Tuning Kits may be connected
via the rear panel, providing extraordinarily sharp selectivity
and receiver protection from close-in interference on a
crowded band.
Superb receiver performance is a direct legacy from the legendary FTDX9000, FT-1000D, and FT-1000MP transceivers. In the VFO-A receive front end, you may select one of
two RF preamplifiers, or one of two IPO (Intercept Point
Optimization) settings, and/or three levels of RF attenuation
in 6-dB steps. The IPO settings provide direct feed to the
first mixer (VFO-B has one IPO setting), Dual Receives are
built into every FTDX5000. Both VFO-A and VFO-B receivers utilizes DSP filtering, and incorporate many of the features of the FTDX9000, such as Variable Bandwidth, IF Shift,
and Passband Contour tuning. Digital Noise Reduction and
Digital Auto-Notch Filtering are also provided, along with a
manually-tuned IF Notch filter. The Sub receiver, used for
monitoring within the same band as the Main receiver, is ideal
for watching both sides of a pile-up, or keeping an ear on a
DX station that is working stations by call area, etc.
On the transmit side, the Yaesu-exclusive Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer allows precise and flexible
adjustment of the wave-form to complement your voice. The
microphone Amplitude, Center Frequency, and Bandwidth
may be adjusted independently for the low-frequency, midrange, and high-audio-frequency spectra. The transmitted
bandwidth may be adjusted, as well.
Advanced features include: Direct Keyboard Entry of frequency and Band Change, Speech Processor, IF Monitor for
Voice modes, CW Pitch control, CW Spot switch, Full CW
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
QSK, adjustable IF Noise Blanker, and all-mode Squelch.
Four TX/ RX antenna ports, plus a receive-only antenna port,
are provided on the rear panel. The front and rear key jacks
may be configured independently, for paddle input, connection to a straight key, or computer-driven keying interface.
Both Digital Voice Recording and CW Message Memory are
provided.
Three unique windows on the right side of the front panel,
display the VFO-B frequency and graphically show the VFOA and VFO-B DSP settings. In Menu Mode operation, these
windows display the menu values, for easy setting.
Set up of frequency, band and mode is especially convenient
on the FTDX5000. Besides direct frequency entry for both
the Main and Sub VFOs, separate keys are provided for band
selection. Each band key accesses three independent VFO
frequency/mode/filter settings per band. You can establish
separate VFO settings for three different parts of each band.
The two (Main and Sub) VFOs allow simultaneous reception and display of two different frequencies, even in different modes and with different IF bandwidths. The Dual Receiver audio can be combined, or partially mixed in each headphone, or monitored separately in each ear.
In addition, 99 memories are provided to store: frequency, IF
filter selection, clarifier offset, and scan-skip status. What’s
more, five quick-recall (“QMB”) memories can instantly store
operational settings at the push of a button.
The built-in automatic antenna tuner includes 100 memories
of its own, to automatically store antenna matching settings
for quick recall later.
Dedicated AFSK and FSK connection jacks on the rear panel
provide simple Interfacing for digital modes. Optimization
of the Passband filters, DSP settings, carrier insertion point,
and display offset are all possible via the Menu programming system.
The Yaesu CAT system provides a direct link to the transceiver CPU for computer control and customization of tuning, scanning, and other operating functions. The FTDX5000
includes a built-in data level converter for direct connection
to a personal computer serial port. Yaesu products are supported by most of the leading contest and DX logging programs. The extensive programming protocol is described in
the CAT System, if you wish to write your own software!
Advanced technology is only part of the FTDX5000 story.
Yaesu Musen stands behind our products with a worldwide
network of dealers and service centers. We greatly appreciate your investment in the FTDX5000, and we look forward
to helping you get the most enjoyment from your new transceiver.
Please feel free to contact your nearest dealer, or one of
Yaesu’s national headquarters offices, for technical advice,
interfacing assistance, or accessory recommendation.
Watch the Yaesu U.S.A. Home Page for late breaking information about Standard Horizon, and Yaesu products: http://
www.yaesu.com.
Please read this manual thoroughly, to gain maximum understanding of the full capability of the FTDX5000. We thank
you again for your purchase!
Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
General Description .................................................... 1
Accessories & Options ................................................. 4
Supplied Accessories ............................................... 4
Available Options .................................................... 4
Before You Begin ......................................................... 6
Connecting AC Power ............................................. 6
Extending the Front Feet ......................................... 6
Adjusting the Main Tuning Dial Torque .................. 6
Resetting the Microprocessor .................................. 7
Resetting Memories (Only) ................................ 7
Menu Resetting .................................................. 7
Full Reset ........................................................... 7
Installation and Interconnections .............................. 8
Antenna Considerations ........................................... 8
About Coaxial Cable ................................................ 8
Grounding ................................................................ 9
Connection of Antenna and Power Cables ............ 10
Connection of Microphone and Headphone .......... 11
Key, Keyer, and Computer-Driven Keying
Interconnections ..................................................... 12
VL-1000 Linear Amplifier Interconnections ......... 13
Interfacing to Other Linear Amplifiers .................. 14
Plug/Connector Pinout Diagrams ............................ 15
Front Panel Controls & Switches ............................. 16
Display Indications .................................................... 30
Rear Panel .................................................................. 33
FH-2 Switches ............................................................ 36
Basic Operation: Receiving on Amateur Bands ..... 37
CLAR (Clarifier) Operation on Main (VFO-A) .... 40
LOCK ..................................................................... 41
DIM ........................................................................ 41
Operation on 60-Meter (5 MHz) Band
(U.S. and U.K. versions only) ............................... 41
Convenience Features ............................................... 42
Dual Receive .......................................................... 42
Using Headphones for Dual Receive ............... 43
Sideband Diversity Reception .......................... 43
Bandwidth Diversity Reception ....................... 44
P.BACK (Audio Playback) from
Main (VFO-A) Receiver ........................................ 45
“MY Bands” Operation ......................................... 46
Band Stack Operation ............................................ 47
C.S (Custom Switch) ............................................. 47
Rotator Control Functions ..................................... 48
More Frequency Navigation Techniques ............... 49
Keyboard Frequency Entry .............................. 49
Using the [(UP)]/[(DOWN)] Buttons ...... 49
Using the UP/DOWN switches of
the supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone ........ 49
Using the []/[]/[]/[] switches of
the supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad ..... 49
Receiver Operation (Front End Block Diagram) ... 50
IPO (Intercept Point Optimization) ....................... 51
ATT ........................................................................ 52
RF Gain (SSB/CW/AM Modes) ............................ 53
Page 2
Advanced Interference-Suppression Features:
RF Front End ............................................................. 54
Using the VRF (Variable RF Front-end Filter) ...... 54
Interference Rejection
(Signals Off Frequency by Just a Few kHz) ........... 56
R.FLT (Roofing Filters) ......................................... 56
Interference Rejection (Signals within 3 kHz) ........ 58
CONTOUR Control Operation .............................. 58
IF SHIFT Operation ............................................... 60
WIDTH (IF DSP Bandwidth) Tuning .................... 61
Using IF Shift and Width Together ........................ 62
IF Notch Filter Operation ...................................... 63
Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) Operation ........... 64
Digital Notch Filter (DNF) Operation ................... 64
NARROW (NAR) One-Touch IF Filter Selection 65
IF Noise Blanker (NB) Operation ......................... 66
Tools for Comfortable and Effective Reception ..... 67
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) ............................ 67
SLOPED AGC Operation ................................ 68
Mute Feature (VFO-A Band) ................................. 69
Adjustable Receiver Audio Filter .......................... 69
SSB/AM Mode Transmission .................................... 70
Using the Automatic Antenna Tuner ....................... 72
ATU Operation ....................................................... 72
About ATU Operation ............................................ 73
Enhancing Transmit Signal Quality ........................ 74
Parametric Microphone Equalizer ......................... 74
Using the Speech Processor ................................... 76
Adjusting the SSB Transmitted Bandwidth ........... 77
Low- Distortion CLASS-A Operation ................... 78
Transmitter Convenience Features .......................... 80
Voice Memory ........................................................ 80
VOX (Automatic TX/RX Switching using Voice Control) ........... 81
MONITOR ............................................................. 81
Split Operation Using the TX Clarifier .................. 82
Split-Frequency Operation .................................... 83
VFO Tracking Feature ..................................... 84
Quick Split Operation ...................................... 85
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CW Mode Operation ................................................. 86
Setup for Straight Key
(and Straight Key emulation) Operation ................ 86
Using the Built-in Electronic Keyer ...................... 88
Full Break-in (QSK) Operation ....................... 89
Setting the Keyer Weight
(Dot/Space:Dash) Ratio .................................... 90
Selecting the Keyer Operating Mode ............... 90
CW Convenience Features ........................................ 91
CW Spotting (Zero-Beating) ................................. 91
Using CW Reverse ................................................. 92
Audio Peak Filter ................................................... 92
CW Delay Time Setting ......................................... 93
CW Pitch Adjustment ............................................ 93
Contest Memory Keyer .......................................... 94
Message Memory ............................................. 94
Transmitting in the Beacon Mode .............. 95
TEXT Memory ................................................. 96
Contest Number Programming ................... 97
Decrementing the Contest Number ............ 97
FM Mode Operation ................................................. 98
Basic Operation ..................................................... 98
Repeater Operation ................................................ 99
Memory Operation .................................................. 100
Convenient Memory functions ............................ 100
QMB (Quick Memory Bank) ............................... 101
Regular Memory Operation ................................. 102
Memory Storage ............................................. 102
Memory Channel Recall ................................ 102
Checking a Memory Channel’s Status ........... 103
Erasing Memory Channel Data ...................... 103
Moving Memory Data to the VFO-A ............ 104
Memory Tune Operation ................................ 104
Memory Groups ................................................... 105
Memory Group Assignment ........................... 105
Choosing the Desired Memory Group ........... 105
Operation on Alaska Emergency Frequency:
5167.5 kHz (U.S. Version Only) .............................. 106
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
VFO and Memory Scanning ................................... 107
VFO Scanning ..................................................... 107
Memory Scan ....................................................... 108
PMS ........................................................................... 109
Packet Operation ..................................................... 110
Packet Setup (Including Subcarrier Frequency) .. 110
Basic Setup .......................................................... 110
RTTY (Radio Teletype) Operation ........................ 111
Setting Up for RTTY Operation .......................... 111
Basic Setup .......................................................... 111
PSK Operation ......................................................... 112
Miscellaneous AFSK-Based Data Modes .............. 113
About the Transverter Output Terminal ............... 114
Setup .................................................................... 114
Operation ............................................................. 115
Menu Mode .............................................................. 116
Using the Menu .................................................... 116
Menu Mode Reset ................................................ 116
AGC Group .......................................................... 121
DISPLAY Group .................................................. 121
DVS Group .......................................................... 122
KEYER Group ..................................................... 123
GENERAL Group ................................................ 124
MODE-AM Group ............................................... 125
MODE-CW Group ............................................... 126
MODE-DAT Group ............................................. 127
MODE-FM Group ............................................... 128
MODE-RTY Group ............................................. 128
MODE-SSB Group .............................................. 129
RX AUDIO Group ............................................... 130
RX GNRL Group ................................................. 130
RX DSP Group .................................................... 131
SCOPE Group ...................................................... 132
TUNING Group ................................................... 133
TX AUDIO Group ............................................... 134
TX GNRL Group ................................................. 136
Specifications ........................................................... 138
Installation of the Optional Roofing Filter ........... 140
Index ......................................................................... 142
FCC Notice ............................................................... 144
Page 3
ACCESSORIES & OPTIONS
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Hand Microphone (MH-31B8)
Remote Control Keypad (FH-2)
AC Power Cord
1 pc
1 pc
1 pc
4-pin DIN Plug
5-pin DIN Plug
1/4-inch 3-contact Plug
3.5 mm 3-contact Plug
3.5 mm 2-contact Plug
RCA Plug
Operating Manual
Warranty Card
SM-5000 Station Monitor
1 pc
1 pc
1 pcs
1 pcs
1 pcs
2 pcs
1 pc
1 pc
1 pc (FTDX5000MP and FTDX5000D version only)
A07890001
AAF22X001
T9017882: USA
T9013285: Europe
T9013283A: Australia
P0091004
P0091006
P0091513
P0091046
P0090034
P0091365
AVAILABLE OPTIONS
MD-200A8X
YH-77STA
SM-5000
SP-2000
VL-1000/VP-1000
DMU-2000
RF μTuning Kit A
RF μTuning Kit B
RF μTuning Kit C
XF-126CN
T9101556
Page 4
Ultra-High-Fidelity Desk-Top Microphone
Lightweight Stereo Headphone
Station Monitor (It is attached with FTDX5000MP and FTDX5000D)
External Speaker with Audio Filter
Linear Amplifier/AC Power Supply
Data Management Unit
For 160 m Band
For 80/40 m Bands
For 30/20 m Bands
CW Narrow Filter (C/F: 9 MHz, B/W: 300 Hz) (It is installed with FTDX5000MP)
Antenna Rotator Connection Cable
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 5
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
CONNECTING AC POWER
The FTDX5000 is equipped with a universal power supply supporting 100 V to 264 V AC.
Therefore, the FTDX5000 will operate on a voltage range
from 100V to 264 V without changing a voltage select
switch. Just use the power plug that matches your wall
outlet.
EXTENDING THE FRONT FEET
In order to elevate the front panel for easy viewing, the
front left and right feet of the bottom case may be extended.
 Pull the front legs outward from the bottom panel.
 Rotate the legs counter-clockwise to lock them in the
extended position. Be sure the legs have locked securely in place, because the transceiver is quite heavy
and an unlocked leg could result in damage, should
the transceiver move suddenly.


Retracting the Front Feet
 Rotate the legs clockwise, and push them inward while
rotating to the right.
 The front feet should now be locked in the retracted
position.


ADJUSTING THE MAIN TUNING DIAL TORQUE
The torque (drag) of the Main Tuning Dial knob may be
adjusted according to your preferences. Simply hold down
the rear skirt of the knob, and while holding it in place
rotate the knob itself to the right to reduce the drag or to
the left to increase the drag.
Hold the Skirt
TIGHTEN
Page 6
LOOSE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
RESETTING
THE
MICROPROCESSOR
RESETTING MEMORIES (ONLY)
Use this procedure to reset (clear out) the previously stored
Memory channels, without affecting any configuration
changes you may have made to the Menu settings.
1. Press the front panel [POWER] switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [AM] button; while holding it
in, press and hold in the front panel [POWER] switch
to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver comes
on, release the buttons.
[POWER] Switch
[AM] Button
MENU RESETTING
Use this procedure to restore the Menu settings to their
factory defaults, without affecting the memories you have
programmed.
1. Press the front panel [POWER] switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button; while holding
it in, press and hold in the front panel [POWER]
switch to turn the transceiver on. Once the transceiver
comes on, release the buttons.
[POWER] Switch
[MENU] Button
FULL RESET
Use this procedure to restore all Menu and Memory settings to their original factory defaults. All Memories will
be cleared out by this procedure.
1. Press the front panel [POWER] switch to turn the
transceiver off.
2. Press and hold in the [FAST] and [LOCK] buttons;
while holding them in, press and hold in the front panel
[POWER] switch to turn the transceiver on. Once the
transceiver comes on, release the switches.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[POWER] Switch
[FAST] / [LOCK]
Button
Page 7
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
ANTENNA CONSIDERATIONS
The FTDX5000 is designed for use with any antenna system providing a 50 Ohm resistive impedance at the desired
operating frequency. While minor excursions from the 50-Ohm specification are of no consequence, if the Standing Wave
Ratio (SWR) present at the Antenna jack is greater than 3:1, the Antenna Tuner may not be able to reduce the impedance
mismatch to an acceptable value.
It is very important, therefore, to ensure that the impedance of the antenna system utilized with the FTDX5000 be as close
as possible to the specified 50-Ohm value.
Note that the “G5RV” type antenna does not provide a 50-Ohm impedance on all HF Amateur bands, and an external wide
range antenna coupler must be used with this antenna type.
Any antenna to be used with the FTDX5000 must, ultimately, be fed with 50 Ohm coaxial cable. Therefore, when using a
“balanced” antenna such as a dipole, remember that a balun or other matching/balancing device must be used to ensure
proper antenna performance.
The same precautions apply to any additional (receive-only) antennas connected to the RX ANT jack; if your receive-only
antennas do not have an impedance near 50 Ohms at the operating frequency, you may need to install an external antenna
tuner to obtain optimum performance.
ABOUT COAXIAL CABLE
Use high-quality 50-Ohm coaxial cable for the lead-in to your FTDX5000 transceiver. All efforts at providing an efficient
antenna system will be wasted if poor quality, lossy coaxial cable is used. This transceiver utilizes standard “M” (“PL259”) type connectors, except for the “RX OUT” BNC connector.
1/16” (2 mm )
Adapter
3/4” (20 mm)
3/4” (20 mm )
1 1/8” (30 mm)
1/8” (3 mm )
3/8” (10 mm)
5/8” (15 mm )
TYPICAL PL-259 INSTALLATION
Page 8
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
GROUNDING
The FTDX5000 transceiver, like any other HF communications apparatus, requires an effective ground system for maximum electrical safety and best communications effectiveness. A good ground system can contribute to station efficiency in
a number of ways:
 It can minimize the possibility of electrical shock to the operator.
 It can minimize RF currents flowing on the shield of the coaxial cable and the chassis of the transceiver; such currents
may lead to radiation which can cause interference to home entertainment devices or laboratory test equipment.
 It can minimize the possibility of erratic transceiver/accessory operation caused by RF feedback and/or improper
current flow through logic devices.
An effective earth ground system may take several forms; for a more complete discussion, see an appropriate RF engineering text. The information below is intended only as a guideline.
Typically, the ground connection consists of one or more copper-clad steel rods, driven into the ground. If multiple ground
rods are used, they should be positioned in a “V” configuration, and bonded together at the apex of the “V” which is
nearest the station location. Use a heavy, braided cable (such as the discarded shield from type RG-213 coaxial cable) and
strong cable clamps to secure the braided cable(s) to the ground rods. Be sure to weatherproof the connections to ensure
many years of reliable service. Use the same type of heavy, braided cable for the connections to the station ground bus
(described below).
Inside the station, a common ground bus consisting of a copper pipe of at least 25 mm (1”) diameter should be used. An
alternative station ground bus may consist of a wide copper plate (single-sided circuit board material is ideal) secured to
the bottom of the operating desk. Grounding connections from individual devices such as transceivers, power supplies,
and data communications devices (TNCs, etc.) should be made directly to the ground bus using a heavy, braided cable.
Do not make ground connections from one electrical device to another, and thence to the ground bus. This so-called
“Daisy-Chain” grounding technique may nullify any attempt at effective radio frequency grounding. See the drawing
below for examples of proper grounding techniques.
Inspect the ground system inside and outside of the station, on a regular basis to ensure maximum performance and safety.
Besides following the above guidelines carefully, note that household or industrial gas lines must never be used in an
attempt to establish an electrical ground. Cold water pipes may, in some instances, help in the grounding effort, but gas
lines represent a significant explosion hazard, and must never be used.
Transceiver
Linear
Amplifier
TNC
Transceiver
Linear
Amplifier
TNC
"Daisy Chain"
PROPER GROUND CONNECTION
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTION
Page 9
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTION OF ANTENNA AND POWER CABLES
ANTENNA "2”
ANTENNA "1”
Follow the below illustration and advice regarding the proper connection of antenna coaxial cables, ground cable, and the
AC power cable.
Use a short, thick, braided cable
to connect your station equipment
to the buried ground rod (or alternative earth ground system).
ADVICE:
 Do not place the transceiver in a location with direct exposure to sunshine.
 Do not place the transceiver in a location exposed to dust and/or high humidity.
 Ensure adequate ventilation around the transceiver, to prevent heat build-up and possible reduction of performance
due to high heat.
 Do not install the transceiver in a mechanically-unstable location, or where objects may fall onto this product from
above.
 To minimize the possibility of interference to home entertainment devices, take all precautionary steps including
separation of TV/FM antennas from Amateur transmitting antennas to the greatest extent possible. Keep transmitting
coaxial cables separated from cables connected to home entertainment devices.
 Ensure that the AC power cord is not subject to undue stress or bending, which could damage the cable or cause it to
be accidentally unplugged from the rear panel AC input jack.
 Be absolutely certain to install your transmitting antenna(s) such that they cannot possibly come in contact with TV/
FM radio or other antennas, nor with outside power or telephone lines.
Page 10
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
CONNECTION OF MICROPHONE AND HEADPHONE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 11
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
KEY, KEYER, AND COMPUTER-DRIVEN KEYING INTERCONNECTIONS
The FTDX5000 includes a host of features for the CW operator. These functions will be detailed in the “Operation” section
later. An Electronic Keyer is built-in, and two key jacks are provided, one on the front and one on the rear panel, for
convenient connection to keying devices.
The Menu system allows you to configure the front and rear panel KEY jacks according to the device you wish to connect.
For example, you may connect your keyer paddle to the front panel KEY jack, and use Menu item “057 A1A F-TYPE” for
paddle input, while connecting the rear panel KEY jack to the keying line from your personal computer (which emulates
a “straight key” for connection purposes), and configure the rear panel jack using Menu item “059 A1A R-TYPE”.
Both KEY jacks on the FTDX5000 utilize “Positive” keying voltage. Key-up voltage is approximately +5V DC, and keydown current is approximately 1 mA. When connecting a key or other device to the KEY jacks, use only a 3-pin (“stereo”) 1/4” phone plug; a 2-pin plug will place a short between the ring and (grounded) shaft of the plug, resulting in a
constant “key-down” condition in some circumstances.
Page 12
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
VL-1000 LINEAR AMPLIFIER INTERCONNECTIONS
Be sure both the FTDX5000 and VL-1000 are turned off, then follow the installation recommendations contained in the
illustration.
NOTE:
 Refer to the VL-1000 Operating Manual for details regarding amplifier operation.
 Do not attempt to connect or disconnect coaxial cables when your hands are wet.
About the CONTROL Cable
The VL-1000 may be operated with the
FTDX5000 whether or not the CONTROL Cable
is connected; however, the CONTROL Cable
allows you to tune up the amplifier automatically by just pressing the [F SET] or [TUNE]
key on the VL-1000, to transmit a carrier for
tuning purposes.
To link the FT DX 5000 and VL-1000 Power
switches, set the VL-1000 REMOTE switch to
the “ON” position.
INPUT
ANT 2
ANT 1
~AC IN
ANT
ANT 3
To ANTENNA
ANTENNA Cable
ANT 1
REMOTE
PTT 1
INPUT 1
ON
OFF
PTT 2
BAND DATA 1
ANT 2
INPUT 2
ALC 1
ANT 3
CONTROL
ALC 2
DC48V IN
ANT 4
GND
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONTROL
GND
ALC 1
DC 48V IN
VP-1000
ALC Cable (Supplied with VL-1000)
VP-1000
CONTROL Cable (Supplied with VL-1000)
BAND-DATA 2
BAND DATA Cable (Supplied with VL-1000)
BAND-DATA 1
TX REQ
EXT ALC
BAND DATA
BAND DATA 2


Page 13
INSTALLATION AND INTERCONNECTIONS
RF IN
GND
FUSE
AC
GND RELAY GND ALC
GND
TX GND
EXT ALC
GND
RF OUT
INPUT 1
ANT 1HF Antenna
ANTENNA Cable
~AC IN
50 MHz Antenna
ANT 2
ANT 1
INTERFACING TO OTHER LINEAR AMPLIFIERS
NOTE
 The TX/RX switching in the linear amplifier is controlled by switching components in the transceiver. The
relay circuit of the FTDX5000 used for this switching
is capable of switching AC voltage of 100 Volts at up
to 300 mA, or DC voltages of 60 V at 200 mA or 30 V
at up to 1 Amp. To activate the amplifier switching
ENrelay, set Menu item “173 TGEN ETX-GND” to “ENABLE
ABLE”.
 The specified range for ALC voltage to be used with
the FTDX5000 is 0 to –4 Volts DC.
 Amplifier systems utilizing different ALC voltages will
not work correctly with the FTDX5000, and their ALC
lines must not be connected if this is the case.
Page 14
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
PLUG /CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The μ-TUNE and DMU use special connectors for this transceiver. Do not connect any accessory or other device not
specifically approved by Yaesu Musen. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage not covered by the Limited
Warranty on this apparatus.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 15
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[POWER] Switch
PHONES Jack
Press this switch in for two seconds to turn the transceiver on. Alternately, press this switch for two seconds to turn the transceiver off. If the rear panel [MAIN
POWER] switch is set to the “O” (OFF) position, the
front panel [POWER] switch will not function.
ADVICE:
 If you press this switch briefly while the transceiver
is turned on, the transceiver audio will be muted
for three seconds.
 This is the actual power On/Off switch for turning
the transceiver on. In the MP version, when the rear
panel [MAIN POWER] switch is set to the “I”
(ON) position, power is supplied to the OCXO to
stabilize the reference oscillator. The remainder of
the transceiver is set in a “stand-by” mode. For further information on the rear panel [MAIN POWER]
switch, please see the discussion on page 35.
A 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts either monaural or
stereo headphones with 2- or 3-contact plugs. When a
plug is inserted, the loudspeaker is disabled. With stereo headphones such as the optional YH-77STA, you
can monitor both VFO-A and VFO-B receiver channels at the same time during Dual Receive operation.
NOTE:
When wearing headphones, we recommend that you
turn the AF Gain levels down to their lowest settings
before turning power on, to minimize the impact of any
audio “pops” on your hearing during switch-on.
CAT Indicator
This LED indicator will flash red when serial CAT command signals are being exchanged.
ADVICE:
You may disable the LED CAT command signal flashing function, via Menu item “035 GENE CAT IND.”
See page 124 for details.
KEY Jack
This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or keyer
paddles (for the built-in electronic keyer), or output
from an external electronic keyer. Pinout is shown on
page 15. Key up voltage is 5 V, and key down current
is 1 mA. This jack may be configured for keyer, “Bug,”
“straight key,” or computer interface keying operation
via Menu item “057 A1A F-TYPE” (see page 126).
There is another KEY jack on the rear panel, and it
may be configured independently for Internal Keyer
or pseudo-straight-key operation.
NOTE:
You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do
so produces a constant “key down” condition).
Microphone Connector
This 8-pin jack accepts input from a microphone utilizing a traditional YAESU HF-transceiver pinout.
Page 16
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[DIM] Switch
[MONI] (Monitor) Switch
Press this button to lower the illumination intensity of
the analog meter and the frequency display. Press it
once more to restore full brightness.
ADVICE:
The following Menu items allow you to configure the
dimming levels of each display independently to customize the brightness levels.
008 DISP DIM MTR: for analog meter
009 DISP DIM VFD: for frequency display
010 DISP DIM OEL: SUB DISPLAY windows
011 DISP DIM ELCD: for Spectrum Scope display
of the optional SM-5000 Station Monitor
This button enables the transmit monitor in all modes.
While activated, the “
” icon appears in the dis[
]
play. Use the MONI knob to adjust the Monitor level.
ADVICE:
The Monitor is highly useful for making adjustments
to the Parametric Equalizer, or other voice characteristic adjustments, while listening with headphones. The
voice quality heard in the headphones is a “natural”
reproduction of the transmitted audio.
[MOX] Switch
Pressing this button engages the PTT (Push to Talk)
circuit, to activate the transmitter. The LED inside the
button will glow red during transmit. It must be turned
off (the red LED will be off) for reception. This button
replicates the action of the Push to Talk (PTT) switch
on the microphone. When engaging the [MOX] button
or otherwise starting a transmission, be certain you have
either an antenna or 50-Ohm dummy load connected
to the selected Antenna jack.
[VOX] Switch
This button enables automatic voice-actuated transmitter switching in the SSB, AM, and FM modes. While
activated, the LED inside the button glows red. Proper
adjustment of the front panel [VOX] and [DELAY]
knobs will make hands-free voice-actuated operation
possible.
[TUNE] Switch
This is the on/off switch for the FTDX5000’s Automatic Antenna Tuner.
Pressing this button briefly, places the antenna tuner in
line between the transmitter final amplifier and the antenna jack (The “
” icon will appear in the display). Reception is not affected.
Pressing this button for 1/2 second, while receiving in
an amateur band, activates the transmitter for a few
seconds while the automatic antenna tuner rematches
the antenna system impedance for minimum SWR. The
resulting setting is automatically stored in one of the
antenna tuner’s 100 memories, for instant automatic
recall later when the receiver is tuned near the same
frequency.
Pressing this button briefly, while the Tuner is engaged,
will take the Automatic Antenna tuner out of the transmit line.
NOTE:
A signal is being transmitted while the tuner is matching the antenna impedance. Therefore, be certain there
is a dummy load or antenna connected to the selected
antenna jack before initiating the tuning sequence.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[PROC] (Processor) Switch
This button enables the Speech Processor for SSB
transmission. While activated, the “
” icon appears
in the display. Adjustment of the Processor level is accomplished using the [PROC] knob.
ADVICE:
 The Speech Processor uses a compression technique
to increase the average power output. However, if
the [PROC] knob is advanced too far, the increase
in compression becomes counter-productive, and
intelligibility will suffer. We recommend that you
monitor the sound of your signal using the Monitor
(with headphones).
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management
Unit is connected, you may use the Audio Scope/
Oscilloscope function to help you adjust the setting of the Speech Processor compression level for
optimum performance with your voice and microphone.
[RX ANT] Switch
Press this button to use an antenna connected to the
RX ANT jack on the rear panel for receive.
The “RX” icon appears in the display when the RX
ANT is used.
[ANT 1-4] Switch
Move this knob up or down to conveniently select one
of the four antenna jacks on the rear panel. The selected antenna jack is indicated in the ANT column of
the Block Diagram Display.
ADVICE:
Press this knob in briefly to quickly select the ANT 1
jack.
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
ANT “1”
Transmitter
Section
TX/RX RELAY
ANT “2”
ANT “3”
ANT “4”
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
Divider
VFO-A
Receiver
SEPARATE
RX ANT
BPF
RX OUT
SEPARATE
VFO-B
Receiver
ANTENNA SWITCH
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B)
(VFO-B)
Page 17
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[ATT] Switch
[R.FLT] Switch
Move this knob up or down to select the degree of
Attenuation to be applied to the receiver input.
Available selections are “–6 dB”, “–12 dB”, “–18 dB”,
or “OFF”. The selected attenuation level appears in
the ATT column of the Block Diagram Display.
ADVICE:
 Press this knob in briefly, to quickly turn the attenuation level off.
 The Attenuator may be used in conjunction with
the [IPO] switch to provide additional gain reduction when an extremely strong signal is being received.
Move this knob up or down to select the bandwidth of
the first IF Roofing Filter. Available selections are “300
Hz”, “600 Hz”, “3 kHz”, “6 kHz”, “15 kHz”, or
“AUTO” (“300 Hz” and “600 Hz” are available only
in VFO-A. The “300 Hz” filter is optional, except in
the MP version). The selected bandwidth appears in
the R.FLT column of the Block Diagram Display.
ADVICE:
 Press this knob in briefly to quickly select “AUTO”.
 Because the roofing filter is in the first IF, the protection it provides against interference is quite significant. When set to “AUTO”, the SSB bandwidth
is 6 kHz, CW is 3 kHz, and FM/RTTY are 15 kHz.
However, on a crowded SSB band, you may wish
to select the 3 kHz filter, for the maximum possible
interference rejection.
[IPO] (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION) Switch
Move this knob up or down to select the optimum front
end characteristics of the receiver circuit. Available
selections are “AMP 1”, “AMP 2”, “IPO 1”, or “IPO
2”.
Normally, IPO is set to “AMP1”. If you want to increase the sensitivity, use “AMP2”. When set to
“IPO1”, the IPO performance of the receivers is improved. When set to “IPO2”, the RF preamplifier is
bypassed, yielding direct feed to the first mixer. As a
result, the IPO is improved more.
ADVICE:
 Press this knob in briefly to quickly select the
“AMP1” IPO setting.
 “IPO 2” can not be selected for VFO-B.
Page 18
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[AGC] Switch
(VFO-B) [NB]
Move this knob up and down to select the receiver AGC
characteristics (receiver-recovery time). Available selections are FAST, MID, SLOW, or AUTO, and the
selected receiver-recovery time appears in the AGC
column of the Block Diagram Display.
Hold this knob up or down for two seconds to disable
the AGC (for testing or weak-signal reception).
ADVICE:
 Press this knob in briefly to quickly select “AUTO”.
 If the AGC is disabled by holding the [AGC] knob
up or down, the S-meter will no longer deflect. Additionally, you will likely encounter distortion on
stronger signals, as the IF amplifiers and the following stages may be overloaded.
[NB] Knob
The inner [NB] knob adjusts the noise blanking
level when the VFO-B (analog) IF noise blanker is
activated by pressing the [NB] button.
[SQL] Knob
The outer [SQL] knob sets the signal level threshold at which the VFO-B receiver audio is muted, in
all modes. The squelch is very useful during local
rag-chews, to eliminate noise between incoming
transmissions. This control is normally kept fully
counter-clockwise (off), except when scanning and
during FM operation.
[METER] Switch
This control switch determines the function of the meter
during transmission.
COMP: Indicates the speech compression level (SSB
mode only).
ALC: Indicates the relative ALC voltage.
PO:
Indicates the average power output level.
SWR: Indicates the Standing Wave Ratio (Forward:
Reflected).
ID:
Indicates the final amplifier drain current.
VDD: Indicates the final amplifier drain voltage.
[MONI]
(VFO-A) [NB]
[SQL] Knobs
[SQL] Knobs
[NB] Knob
The inner [NB] knob adjusts the noise blanking
level when the VFO-A (analog) IF noise blanker is
activated by pressing the [NB] button.
[SQL] Knob
The outer [SQL] knob sets the signal level threshold at which the VFO-A receiver audio is muted, in
all modes. The squelch is very useful during local
rag-chews, to eliminate noise between incoming
transmissions. This control is normally kept fully
counter-clockwise (off), except when scanning and
during FM operation.
[PROC] Knobs
[MONI] Knob
The inner [MONI] knob adjusts the audio level of
the transmit RF monitor during transmission (relative to the AF GAIN control), when activated by
the [MONI] button.
[PROC] Knob
The outer [PROC] knob sets the compression (input) level of the transmitter Speech Processor in
the SSB, AM, and FM modes, when activated by
the [PROC] button.
ADVICE:
The relative compression level of the Speech Processor will show for 3-seconds in the lower right
corner of the Main Display whenever the outer
[PROC] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 19
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[MIC]
[RF PWR] Knobs
[MIC] Knob
The inner [MIC] knob adjusts the microphone input level for (non-processed) SSB transmission.
ADVICE:
 Adjust the MIC Gain while speaking in a somewhat-louder-than-normal voice. Watch the ALC
level and adjust the MIC Gain so that the ALC
indication reaches just to the right edge of the
scale. Then, when you speak in a normal voice
level, you will not over-driving the mic amplifier stage.
 The relative Microphone Gain level will show
for 3-seconds in the lower right corner of the
Main Display whenever the inner [MIC] knob
is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may
be changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III
window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature via Menu item “017 DISP LVL
IND” See page 122 for details.
Page 20
[RF PWR] Knob
The outer [RF PWR] knob is the main RF Power
output control for the transceiver. It is active in all
operating modes. Clockwise rotation increases the
power output. Adjust this control for the desired
power output from the FTDX5000.
ADVICE:
The RF Power output will show for 3 seconds in
the lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the outer [RF PWR] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[SPEED]
[PITCH] Knobs
[SPEED] Knob
The inner [SPEED] knob adjusts the keying speed
of the internal CW keyer (4 ~ 60 WPM). Clockwise rotation increases the sending speed.
The keying speed will show for 3 seconds in the
lower right corner of the Main Display while the
[KEYER] button is held depressed for more than
one second.
ADVICE:
The keying speed will show for 3 seconds in the
lower right corner of the Main Display whenever
the outer [SPEED] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
[PITCH] Knob
The outer [PITCH] knob selects your preferred CW
tone pitch (from 300 ~ 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz increments). The TX sidetone, the receiver IF passband,
and the display offset from the BFO (carrier) frequency are all affected simultaneously. The Pitch
control setting also affects the operation of the CW
Tuning Indicator, as the center frequency of the CW
Tuning Indicator will follow the setting of this control.
ADVICE:
The CW tone pitch frequency will show for 3 seconds in the lower right corner of the Main Display
whenever the outer [SPEED] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
[VOX]
[DELAY] Knobs
[VOX] Knob
The inner [VOX] knob sets the level of microphone
audio needed to activate the transmitter during voice
operation when the [VOX] switch is actuated.
[DELAY] Knob
The outer [DELAY] knob sets the hang time of the
VOX circuit for voice operation, and the keying
delay for CW operation.
For voice operation, this knob sets the hang time,
between the moment you stop speaking, and the
time the transmit is switched back to receive. For
smooth operation, adjust the VOX so the transmit
switches to receive when your comments have
ended.
For CW, this knob sets the automatic transmit to
receive keying delay for “Semi-break-in” operation.
Adjust this just long enough to prevent the receiver
from being restored during word spaces at your
preferred sending speed.
ADVICE:
The hang time of the VOX circuit will show for 3
seconds in the lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the outer [SPEED] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
(VFO-B)[AF GAIN]
[RF GAIN] Knobs
[AF GAIN] Knob
The inner [AF GAIN] knob sets the audio level of
the VFO-B receiver. Typically, you will operate with
this control set between the 9 o’clock and 10 o’clock
positions.
[RF GAIN] Knob
The outer [RF GAIN] knob sets the gain of the RF
and IF amplifier stages of the VFO-B receiver. This
control is normally left in the fully clockwise position.
(VFO-A) [AF GAIN]
[RF GAIN] Knobs
[AF GAIN] Knob
The inner [AF GAIN] knob sets the audio level of
the VFO-A receiver. Typically, you will operate with
this control set between the 9 o’clock and 10 o’clock
positions.
[RF GAIN] Knob
The outer [RF GAIN] knob sets the gain of the RF
and IF amplifier stages of the VFO-A receiver. This
control is normally left in the fully clockwise position.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 21
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[A], [B] Switches
QMB (Quick Memory Bank) Switches
Pressing the [A] or [B] button will illuminate the respective switch, and allow adjustment of the major
functions (such as mode and band selection etc) on the
VFO-A or VFO-B receiver. Usually, the [A] button will
glow red, and the VFO-A functions may be adjusted.
Similarly, pressing the [B] button will cause its indicator glow orange, signifying the VFO-B functions may
be adjusted.
ADVICE:
The [A]/[B] switches affect the following functions:
 [RX ANT] switch
 [ANT 1-4] switch
 [ATT] switch
 [IPO] switch
 [R.FLT] switch
 [AGC] switch
 [NAR] switch
 [BAND] switches
 [MODE] switches
 [NB] switch
 [RX ANT] switch
[STO] (Store) Button
Pressing this button, copies the operating information for frequency, mode, and bandwidth, into consecutive QMB Memories. Repeater shift/direction,
frequency and CTCSS functions, are also copied
in the FM mode.
[RCL] (Recall) Button
Pressing this button recalls one of the five Quick
Memory Bank memories for operation.
[NAR] (Narrow) Switch
This button is used to set the DSP (digital) filters to
narrow bandwidths. The default values are as follows:
MODE
OFF
NAR SWITCH
kHz
LSB/USB (1.8 kHz -2.4
4.0 kHz / 16 steps)
2.4 kHz
CW
(500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
RTTY
500 Hz
(LSB)
(500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
PKT
500 Hz
(LSB/USB) (500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
PKT
25 kHz
(FM)
(±5.0 kHz Deviation)
AM
9 kHz
25 kHz
FM
(±5.0 kHz Deviation)
ON
1.8 kHz
(200 Hz - 1.8 kHz / 9 steps)
500 Hz
(50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
300 Hz
(50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
300 Hz
(50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
12.5 kHz
(±2.5 kHz Deviation)
6 kHz
12.5 kHz
(±2.5 kHz Deviation)
: You may enable the [WIDTH] knob to adjust the
bandwidth.
Page 22
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[SPLIT] Switch
Main Tuning Dial Knob
Press this button briefly to activate split frequency operation between the VFO-A receiver and the VFO-B,
transmit. Press and hold in this button for two seconds
to engage the “Quick Split” feature, whereby VFO-B
will automatically be set to a frequency 5 kHz higher
than the VFO-A frequency with the same operating
mode, and the transceiver will be placed in the Split
mode.
This large knob adjusts the operating frequency of
VFO-A or a recalled memory. Clockwise rotation of
the knob increases the frequency. Default tuning increments are 10 Hz (100 Hz in FM mode); when the
[FAST] button is pressed, the tuning steps increase.
The available steps are:
[TXW] (TX Watch) Switch
Press and hold this button to monitor the transmit frequency when split frequency operation is engaged.
Release the button to return to normal operation.
[CLASS-A] Switch
Press this button to engage the Class-A transmit capability. The power output will be reduced to a maximum of 75 Watts. However, Class-A operation provides an ultra-clean SSB waveform. When Class-A operation is engaged, the “CLASS-A” icon appears in
the display. Press this button once more to return to
Class-AB operation at a maximum power output of 200
Watts; the “CLASS-A” icon disappears to confirm
Class-AB operation.
ADVICE:
You may adjust the bias level between “Class-AB” and
“Class-A” via Menu item “170 TGEN BAIS”. See
page 136 for details.
[C.S] Switch
Press this button briefly to recall a favorite Menu Selection directly.
To assign a Menu selection as the short-cut, press the
[MENU] button to enter the Menu, then select the Menu
item. Now press and hold in the [C.S] button for two
seconds to lock the selected Menu item as the short-cut.
(VFO-A)[RX] Indicator/Switch
Press this button to engage the VFO-A receiver; the
button will glow green when the VFO-A receiver is
active.
When the VFO-A receiver is active, pressing this button briefly will mute the receiver, and the indicator will
blink. Pressing the button once more will restore receiver operation, and the indicator will glow green
steadily.
(VFO-A)[TX] Indicator/Switch
When this button is pressed, the button indicator will
glow red and the transmitter frequency and mode will
be controlled by VFO-A (subject to any Clarifier offset, of course).
ADVICE:
If this indicator is not illuminated, it means that VFOB TX has been selected (In this case, The VFO-B TX
indicator will glow red and the transmitter frequency
and mode will be controlled by VFO-B).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
OPERATING MODE
LSB/USB/CW/RTTY/PKT(SSB)/
AM
FM/PKT(FM)
1 STEP
1 DIAL ROTATION
10 Hz (100 Hz) 10 kHz (100 kHz)
100 Hz (1 kHz) 100 kHz (1 MHz)
Numbers in parentheses indicate steps when the [FAST] button is On.
ADVICE:
 The tuning steps for the Main Tuning Dial knob
are set, at the factory, to 10 Hz per step. Via Menu
item “143 TUN DIAL STEP”, however, you may
change this setting from 10 Hz to 5 Hz or 1 Hz
instead. When the [FAST] button is pressed, the
tuning step change to 100 Hz.
 You may lock the Main Tuning Dial knob in the
AM and FM mode via Menu items “148 TUN AM
D.LCK” and “149 TUN FM D.LCK”.
[FAST] Switch
Pressing this button will change the VFO-A tuning
step to 100 Hz.
When this function is activated, the “
” icon appears in the display.
[LOCK] Switch
This button toggles locking of the Main Tuning Dial
knob, to prevent accidental frequency changes. When
the button is active, the Main Tuning Dial knob can
still be turned, but the VFO-A frequency will not
change, and the “
” icon appears in the display.
[BAND] Keys
These buttons allow one-touch selection of the desired
amateur band (1.8 ~ 50 MHz).
What’s more, these buttons may be used for direct entry of a desired operating frequency during VFO operation.
[MODE] Switches
Pressing one of these buttons, selects the operating
mode. Repeated presses of a particular switch will
toggle to the alternate mode, or step through the available selections, as shown in the chart below.
SWITCH
VARIABLE MODE SELECTION
LSB
USB
CW
AM/FM
RTTY
PKT
LSB
USB
CW (LSB) CW (USB)
AM FM
RTTY (LSB) RTTY (USB)
PKT (LSB)PKT (USB)PKT (FM) .....
Page 23
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[AB] Switch
[AM] Switch
Press this button briefly to transfer data from the VFOA frequency (or a recalled memory channel) to VFOB, overwriting any previous contents in VFO-B. Use
this button to set both VFO-A and VFO-B receivers to
the same frequency and mode.
Pressing and holding in this button for 1/2 second (until the double beep), copies the current operating data
from VFO-A into the currently selected memory channel, overwriting any previous data stored there. See
page 102 for details.
Also, pressing and holding in this button after recalling a memory, without first retuning, causes the memory
channel to be “masked,” and repeating the process restores the masked memory.
[A
B] Switch
Pressing this button briefly, exchanges the contents of
the VFO-A (or a recalled memory channel) and the
VFO-B.
[V/M] Switch
This button toggles VFO-A receiver operation between
the memory system and the VFO. Either “
” or
“
” will be displayed under the main frequency
display field to indicate the current selection. If you
have tuned off of a Memory channel frequency (MT),
pressing this button returns the display to the original
memory contents (MR), and pressing it once more returns operation to VFO-A (no icon).
[MA] Switch
Press this button briefly, to display the contents of the
currently-selected memory channel for three seconds.
Holding this button in for 2 seconds copies the data
from the currently-selected memory to VFO-A, as two
beeps sound. Previous data in VFO-A will be overwritten.
Page 24
[MENU] Switch
This button is used to access the Menu system, for configuring various transceiver characteristics. Menu operation is described in detail, in this manual, beginning on page 116.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Pressing this button briefly activates the Menu, and
the Menu items will appear on the SUB DISPLAY
windows. Once you are finished, you must press and
hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save
any configuration changes (briefly press the [MENU]
button to exit without saving the changes).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[NB] Switch
[RX CLAR(FAST)] Switch
This button turns the IF Noise Blanker on and off.
Press this button briefly to reduce a short-duration pulse
noise; the “
” icon will appear in the display.
Press this button once more to reduce a longer-duration man-made pulse noise; the “ ” icon will appear
at the right of the “
” icon.
Press this button again to disable the noise blanker;
the “
” and “ ” icon will disappear.
The function of this button differs with the setting of
the [A/B] button (described later).
When the LED in the [A/B] button is turned off, pressing this button activates the RX Clarifier, to allow offsetting the VFO-A receiving frequency temporarily.
Press this button once more to return the Main receiver
to the frequency shown on the main frequency display
field; the Clarifier offset will still be present, though,
in case you want to use it again. To cancel the Clarifier
offset, press the [CLEAR] button.
When [A/B] button glows orange, pressing this button will change the VFO-B tuning step to 100 Hz.
When this function is activated, the “
” icon appears in the display.
[KEYER] Switch
This button toggles the internal CW keyer on and off.
While activated, the “
” icon appears in the display. The keyer sending speed is adjusted via the front
panel [SPEED] knob, and the CW Hang Time is adjusted via the front panel [DELAY] knob.
ADVICE:
When this button is held for more than one second, the
keying speed will be displayed in the lower right corner of the Main Display until the button is released.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. See page 122 for
details.
[SPOT] Switch
This button turns on the CW receiver spotting tone; by
matching the SPOT tone to that of the incoming CW
signal (precisely the same pitch), you will be “zero
beating” your transmitted signal with the frequency of
the other station.
ADVICE:
The offset tone frequency will be displayed in the lower
right corner of the Main Display when this button is
pressed.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. See page 122 for
details.
[CLEAR] Switch
Pressing this button clears out any frequency offset you
have programmed into the Clarifier register (thereby
setting the offset to “Zero”).
[TX CLAR/LOCK] Switch
The function of this button is changed by the setting of
the [A/B] button (described later).
When the [A/B] button is turned off, pressing the [TX
CLAR/LOCK] button activates the TX Clarifier, to
allow offsetting the VFO-A transmit frequency temporarily. Press the button once more to return the transmitter to the VFO-A frequency shown on the main frequency display field; the Clarifier offset will still be
present, though, in case you want to use it again. To
cancel the Clarifier offset, press the [CLEAR] button.
When the [A/B] button glows orange, the [TX CLAR/
LOCK] button toggles locking of the [CLAR(VFOB)] knob, to prevent accidental frequency changes.
When the lock is active, the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob
can still be turned, but the VFO-B frequency will not
change, and the “
” icon appears in the display.
[BK-IN] Switch
This button turns the CW break-in capability on and
off. While the CW break-in is activated, the “
”
icon appears in the display.
[(DOWN)]/[(UP)] Switches
These buttons adjust the operating frequency of the
VFO or a recalled memory in 100 kHz steps.
SUB DISPLAY-I
This OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode) display
shows the VFO-B frequency, and it indicates the Menu
List while the Menu Mode is active.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 25
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
[CLAR/GRP] Switch
(VFO-B)[RX] Indicator/Switch
This button has two functions.
Press this button briefly, the [CLAR/VFO-B] knob
will be enabled as an “offset tuning” control to allow
tuning away from the VFO-A frequency, and the
[CLAR/GRP] button will glow red.
Pressing and holding this button for one second, allows you to select the memory group using the
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob, and the [CLAR/GRP] button will glow yellow.
This is the button that turns the VFO-B receiver “On”
and “Off”. When the VFO-B receiver is active, the
button will glow green. Pressing this button again will
disable VFO-B receiver, and the imbedded green LED
will turn off. Press and hold in this button for two seconds to activate the VFO Traking feature.
[BAND(MCH)] Switch
This button has two functions.
Pressing this button briefly, enables the [CLAR(VFOB)] knob to select the VFO-A operating Amateur Band.
The [CLAR/GRP)] button glows red.
Pressing and holding this button for one second, allows you to select the memory channel using the
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob, and the [CLAR/GRP] button is glows yellow.
[A/B] Switch
This button switches the actions of the [CLAR(VFOB)] knob between VFO-A and VFO-B.
Pressing this button once causes the button to glows
yellow; in this case, rotation of the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob affects operation on VFO-B (tuning, etc.). Pressing this button once more causes the button to turn off;
in this instance, rotation of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob
affects operations associated with the VFO-A (Clarifier function, etc.).
Page 26
(VFO-B)[TX] Indicator/Switch
This button turns the VFO-B transmitter “On” and
“Off”. When this button is pressed, it will glow red
and VFO-B will control the transmitter frequency and
mode. Pressing this button once more will transfer frequency/mode control back to VFO-A, and the red LED
in the button will turn off.
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
The function of this knob differs according to the settings of the three switches located above the knob. See
the next page for details.
SUB DISPLAY-II
This OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode) display
shows the characteristics of the VFO-A receiver DSP
functions selected by five of the buttons located below
of this display. The (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob located
below this window is an adjustment knob for the function displayed in this window. Alternately, when the
Menu Mode is activated, this OLED displays the selected Menu item.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
(VFO-A)[VRF/μ-T] Switch
(VFO-A)[SHIFT] Switch
This button turns the VFO-A receiver VRF filter “on”
and “off”, and allows you to adjust the center frequency
of the VRF filter with the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob.
While activated, the red LED in this button will light
up, and the “
” icon will appear in the FLT column
of the Block Diagram Display.
ADVICE:
When an optional RF μTuning Kit is connected, pressing this button will engage the μ-Tuning filter. The
μTuning Kit provides much better RF selectivity than
any other RF filter in the Amateur industry, yielding
outstanding protection from high RF levels not far removed from the current operating frequency.
Pressing this button allows you to move the IF DSP
bandwidth of VFO-A “higher” or “lower” with the
(VFO-A)[SELECT] knob. When the IF passband is
shifted, the red LED imbedded in this button will light
up. To the contrary, when the IF passband is just centered, the red LED in this button turns off.
(VFO-A) [CONT/APF] Switch
In the SSB, AM, and FM modes, this button turns the
VFO-A receiver contour filter “on” and “off”, and allows you to adjust the center frequency of the contour
filter with the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob. When the
contour filter is activated, the red LED in this button
will light up.
In the CW mode, this button turns the VFO-A receiver
APF (Audio Peak Filter) “on” and “off”, and allows
you to adjust the bandwidth of the APF filter with the
(VFO-A)[SELECT] knob. When the APF filter is activated, the red LED in this button will light up.
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob Functions
When the LED in the [A/B] button is turned “off”
In this case, the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob is used for Clarifier tuning, as well as Up/Down selection of the Amateur
band, Memory Channels, 1 MHz tuning steps, or Memory Groups.
Clarifier Operation
When the [CLAR/GRP] button is pressed briefly, the
imbedded LED in the button will glow red, and the
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob may be used to program an
offset of up to ± 9.999 kHz from the VFO-A frequency.
However, this offset is only applied to the receive or
transmit frequency if the [RX CLAR/FAST] button
and/or [TX CLAR/LOCK] button, respectively, have
been pushed.
To apply the programmed frequency offset to the Receive frequency, press the [RX CLAR/FAST] button
briefly. To return to the VFO-A frequency, without the
offset, press the [RX CLAR/FAST] button once more.
To apply the programmed frequency offset to the Transmit frequency, press the [TX CLAR/LOCK] button
briefly. To return the transmitter to the VFO-A frequency, without the offset, press the [TX CLAR/
LOCK] button once more.
To reset the Clarifier frequency offset to “0”, press the
[CLEAR] button.
BAND Up / Down Control
When the [BAND/MCH] button is pressed briefly, the
LED in the button will glow red, and enable the use of
the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the desired amateur band. If you have engaged the “My Bands” feature via Menu #145, the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob will
select just from the amateur bands that you have included in the “My Bands” list.
Memory Channel / Memory Group Control
Press and hold in the [BAND/MCH] button for two
seconds, the LED in the button will glow yellow, and
the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob may be used to select the
desired Memory Channel.
Press and hold in the [CLAR/GRP] button for two
seconds, the LED in the button will glow yellow, and
you may use the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the
desired Memory Group.
When the LED in the [A/B] button glows orange
When the [A/B] button is pressed, the LED in the button will glow orange, and the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob will
control functions associated with the VFO-B frequency control register.
VFO-B FAST Tuning
When the [RX CLAR/FAST] button is pressed, the
” icon appears in the display, and the VFO-B
“
tuning step changes to 100 Hz. Press the [RX CLAR/
FAST] button once more to return to the normal tuning rate.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
VFO-B Dial Lock
When the [TX CLAR/LOCK] button is pressed, the
“
” icon appears in the display, and the
[CLAR ( VFO-B )] knob is locked. Press the [ RX
CLAR/FAST] button once more to disable the lock
feature.
Page 27
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
(VFO-A)[NOTCH] Switch
(VFO-A)[DNF] Switch
This button turns the VFO-A receiver IF notch filter
“on” and “off”, and allows you to adjust the center frequency of the notch filter with the (VFO-A)[SELECT]
knob. When the notch filter is activated, the red LED
in this button will light up.
This button toggles the VFO-A Receiver Digital Notch
Filter “on” and “off”. When the Digital Notch Filter is
activated, the red LED in the button will light up. This
is an automatic circuit, and there is no adjustment knob
for the DNF.
(VFO-A)[WIDTH] Switch
SUB DISPLAY-III
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the overall
bandwidth of the VFO-A receiver IF DSP filter with
the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob. When the bandwidth
is set to other than the factory default, the red LED in
this button will light up. When the bandwitdh is set to
default, the red LED in this button turns off.
This OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode) display
shows the characteristics of the VFO-B Receiver DSP
functions selected by the five buttons located below of
the display. Use the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob located
below this window to adjust the function displayed in
the window. Alternately, when the Menu Mode is activated, this OLED displays the current menu selection.
(VFO-A)[RESET] Switch
Pressing this button will reset the function selected by
the five buttons located above and left of the button to
the factory default function.
(VFO-A)[DNR] Switch
This button toggles the VFO-A Receiver Digital Noise
Reduction circuit “on” and “off”, and allows you to
adjust the noise reduction level with the ( VFOA)[SELECT] knob. When the Digital Noise Reduction is activated, the red LED in the button will light
up.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
This knob is used to adjust status of the functions selected by the five buttons located above the knob.
Page 28
(VFO-B)[VRF] Switch
This button turns the VFO-B Receiver VRF Filter “on”
and “off”, and permits adjustment of the VRF Filter
center frequency, using the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob.
While activated, the orange LED in the button will light
up, and the “
” icon will appear in the FLT column
of the Block Diagram Display.
(VFO-B)[SHIFT] Switch
Pressing this button allows you to move the IF DSP
bandwidth of VFO-B “higher” or “lower” with the
(VFO-B)[SELECT] knob. When the IF passband is
shifted, the orange LED in the button will light up.
Alternately, when the IF passband is centered, the LED
in the button turns off.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS & SWITCHES
(VFO-B)[CONT/APF] Switch
(VFO-B)[RESET] Switch
In the SSB, AM, and FM modes, this button turns the
VFO-B Receiver Contour Filter “on” and “off”, and
enables adjustment of the Contour Filter center frequency with the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob. When the
Contour Filter is activated, the orange LED in the button will light up.
In the CW mode, this button turns the VFO-B Receiver
APF (Audio Peak Filter) “on” and “off”, and allows
you to adjust the bandwidth of the APF filter with the
(VFO-B)[SELECT] knob. When the APF filter is activated, the orange LED in the button will light up.
Pressing this button will reset the function selected by
the five buttons above and left of the button to factory
default.
(VFO-B)[NOTCH] Switch
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
This button turns the VFO-B Receiver IF notch filter
“on” and “off”, and enables adjustment of the notch
filter center frequency with the (VFO-B)[SELECT]
knob. When the notch filter is activated, the orange
LED in the button will light up.
(VFO-A)[DNF] Switch
(VFO-B)[WIDTH] Switch
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the overall
bandwidth of the VFO-B receiver IF DSP filter with
the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob. When the bandwidth
is set to other than the factory default, the orange LED
in the button will light up. Alternately, when the bandwidth is set to default, the orange LED in the button
turns off.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-B)[DNR] Switch
This button toggles the VFO-B Receiver Digital Noise
Reduction circuit “on” and “off”, and allows you to
adjust the noise reduction level with the ( VFOB)[SELECT] knob. When the Digital Noise Reduction is activated, the orange LED in the button will
light up.
This knob is used to adjust status of the functions selected by the five buttons located above the knob.
This button toggles the VFO-A Receiver Digital Notch
Filter “on” and “off”. When the Digital Notch Filter is
activated, the orange LED in the button will light up.
This is an automatic circuit, and there is no adjustment
knob for the DNF.
Page 29
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (LEFT SIDE)
(VFO-A) Block Diagram Display
(VFO-A) Status Indicator
ANT (1, 2, 3, 4, RX):
Indicates the antenna selected for operation by the front
panel [ANT 1-4] and [RX ANT] switches.
ATT (OFF, –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB):
Indicates the attenuation level selected for operation
by the front panel [ATT] button.
FLT (VRF, μ-TUNE, THRU):
Indicates the RF filter selected for operation by the
front panel (VFO-A)[VRF/μ-T] button.
ADVICE:
The μ-TUNE filter is an option. The “
” icon will
not appear when the optional μ-TUNE unit is not connected.
IPO (AMP1, AMP2, IPO1, IPO2):
Indicates the front end RF amplifier selected for operation by the front panel [IPO] button.
R.FLT (300, 600, 3k, 6k, 15k):
Indicates the 1st IF Roofing Filter selected for operation with the front panel [R.FLT] button.
ADVICE:
The 300 Hz Roofing Filter is an option except the MP
version. The “300” icon will not appear when the optional 300 Hz Roofing Filter is not installed.
AGC (AUTO, FAST, MID, SLOW):
Indicates the AGC decay time selected for operation
by the front panel [AGC] switch.
:
This indicator appears during transmission on the VFOA frequency.
:
This indicator appears whenever the VFO-A receiver
squelch is open. If this indicator is not showing, and
reception seems to have been lost on the VFO-A receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of
the (VFO-A)[SQL] knob, and rotate it fully counterclockwise to restore reception.
:
This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial tuning rate is selected to fast.
:
This indicator appears when the Main Tuning Dial knob
is locked.
IMPORTANT NOTE
,
,
,
,
,
,
Displays the currently-selected operating mode for
VFO-A.
This indicator appears whenever the VFO-A receiver’s
narrow IF DSP filter is engaged.
The “
” icon appears when the VFO-A receiver’s
(short duration) Noise Blanker is activated.
The “
” icon appears when the VFO-A receiver’s
(longer-pulse) Noise Blanker is activated.
The FTDX5000 uses a Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD).
With long-term use, it is normal for the indication
color to change and the brightness level to decrease.
The 50 % brightness level is rated more than 30
thousand hours.
Page 30
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (LEFT SIDE)
(VFO-B) Receiver S-Meter
(VFO-B) Status Indicator
Displays the strength of signals received on VFO-B.
:
This indicator appears during transmission on the VFOB frequency.
:
This indicator appears whenever the VFO-B receiver
squelch is open. If this indicator is not showing, and
reception seems to have been lost on the VFO-B receiver for no apparent reason, check the position of
the (VFO-B)[SQL] knob and rotate it fully counterclockwise to restore reception.
:
This indicator appears when the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob’s tuning rate is selected to fast.
:
This indicator appears when the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob is locked.
(VFO-B) Block Diagram Display
ANT (1, 2, 3, 4, RX):
Indicates the antenna selected for operation by the front
panel [ANT 1-4] and [RX ANT] switches.
ATT (OFF, –6 dB, –12 dB, –18 dB):
Indicates the attenuation level selected for operation
by the front panel [ATT] button.
FLT (VRF, THRU):
Indicates the RF filter selected for operation by the
front panel (VFO-B)[VRF] button.
IPO (AMP1, AMP2, IPO1):
Indicates the front end RF amplifier selected for operation by the front panel [IPO] button.
R.FLT (3k, 6k, 15k):
Indicates the 1st IF Roofing Filter selected for operation by the front panel [R.FLT] button.
AGC (AUTO, FAST, MID, SLOW):
Indicates the AGC decay time selected for operation
by the front panel [AGC] switch.
This indicator appears whenever the Digital Noise Reduction feature is activated.
,
,
,
,
,
,
Displays the currently-selected operating mode for
VFO-B.
This indicator appears whenever the VFO-B receiver’s
narrow IF DSP filter is engaged.
The “
” icon appears when the VFO-B receiver’s
(short duration) Noise Blanker is activated.
The “
” icon appears when the VFO-B receiver’s
(longer-pulse) Noise Blanker is activated.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 31
DISPLAY INDICATIONS (RIGHT SIDE)
This indicator appears when the transmit monitor circuit is activated.
This indicator appears when the internal CW keyer is
activated.
This indicator appears when CW break-in operation is
activated.
This indicator appears when the DSP Speech Processor is activated.
This indicator appears when the internal Automatic Antenna Tuner is activated.
This indicator appears if the directional coupler and
microprocessor detect an abnormally high SWR condition (over 3.0:1) that cannot be resolved by the Automatic Antenna Tuner.
NOTE:
If this indicator appears, check to be sure that you have
the correct antenna selected on the current operating
band. If so, you will need to check the condition of the
antenna, its coaxial cable, and/or the connectors on the
cable, to locate and correct the fault.
This indicator appears while the voice recorder is playing back the recorded audio, and/or the memory is playing back the recorded CW or voice message.
This indicator appears while the voice recorder is recording the receiver audio, and/or the memory is recording your CW or voice message.
This indicator appears when the Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer is activated via the Menu.
This indicator appears when Class-A operation is engaged.
Tuning Offset Indicator
This is a tuning scale that, as configured from the factory, provides a visual CW tuning indication of the incoming signal’s offset from your transceiver’s CW carrier frequency, as programmed by the relative clarifier
offset, or the peak position of the VRF/μ-TUNE filter.
CLAR
This indicator appears when the Clarifier function is
activated.
ADVIDE:
When adjusting some knobs, the current value will
appear in this area.
VFO-A Frequency Display
This is the VFO-A frequency display.
This indicator appears when the transceiver is in the
Memory Recall mode.
This indicator appears when the transceiver is in the
Memory Tune mode to indicate that the memory contents have been temporarily changed.
Page 32
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
IF OUT Jacks
GND
This RCA jack outputs the 9 MHz IF signal of the received signal when Menu item “109 RGEN IF OUT”
ENABLED
is set to “ENABLED
ENABLED”. This signal does not pass through
the roofing filter.
Use this terminal to connect the transceiver to a good
earth ground, for safety and optimum performance. Use
a large diameter, short braided cable for making ground
connections. Please refer to page 9 for other notes about
proper grounding.
ANT 1, 2, 3, 4 Jacks
Connect your main antenna(s) here, using a type-M
(PL-259) plug and coaxial feedline for each. These antenna ports are always used for transmission. They are
also used for reception, unless a separate receive antenna is connected to the RX ANT IN jack and used
for the receiver. The internal antenna tuner affects only
the antenna(s) connected here, and only during transmission.
Warning!
The 141V RF voltage (@200 W/50 ) is applied to
the TX RF section of the transciver while transmitting.
Do not touch the TX RF section absolutely while transmitting.
RX ANT IN Jack
The BNC jack provides output of the receiver signal
from the Antenna jacks, which are connected to the
“RX” side of the transceiver T/R switching circuitry.
The type-M jack is for a separate, receive-only antenna.
An antenna connected here can be used when the [RX
ANT] button on the front panel is pressed.
If you want to use some special kind of external
bandpass filter or preamplifier, you may connect it
between the “RX ANT OUT” and “RX ANT IN” jacks.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
μ-TUNE Jacks
These jacks are used for signal input/output of the optional RF μTuning Kits.
ROTATOR Jack
This 6-pin MINI-DIN Jack accepts a cable connected
to a YAESU G-800DXA/-1000DXA/-2800DXA (for
USA/EXP market) or G-800DXC/-1000DXC/2800DXC (for European market) Antenna Rotator
(listed models are current as of early 2013). You may
control the antenna azimuth rotation (and rotation
speed) using the Function buttons on the front panel.
BAND DATA Jack
This 8-pin output jack provides band selection data
which may be used for control of optional accessories
such as the VL-1000 Solid-state Linear Amplifier.
PACKET Jack
This 5-pin input/output jack provides receiver audio
and squelch signals, and accepts transmit (AFSK) audio and PTT control, from an external Packet TNC.
Pinout is shown on page 15. The receiver audio level
at this jack is approximately 100 mVp-p (@600 Ohms).
Page 33
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
RTTY Jack
PTTJack
This 4-pin input/output jack provides connections for
an RTTY terminal unit. Pinout is shown on page 15.
The receiver audio level at this jack is at a constant
100-mV (@600 Ohms) level. FSK keying at this jack
is accomplished by a closure of the SHIFT line to
ground by the terminal unit.
This RCA input jack may be used to provide manual
transmitter activation using a footswitch or other
switching device. Its function is identical to the [MOX]
button on the front panel. The same line is available at
the PACKET and RTTY jacks for TNC control. Open
circuit voltage is +13.5 VDC, and closed-circuit current is 5 mA.
AF OUT Jack
This 3.5-mm, 3-contact jack provides dual-channel
low-level receiver output, for recording or external amplification. Peak signal level is 300 mVp-p at 10 kOhms. The VFO-A receiver audio is on the left channel (tip), and the VFO-B receiver audio is on the right
channel (ring). A stereo amplifier or recorder is recommended, to record each receiver’s audio separately
when dual reception is enabled (audio from either receiver, or both, may be used). The front panel [AF
GAIN] knobs do not affect the signals at this jack.
V-AF Jack
This 3.5-mm, 3-contact jack is used for connection to
the optional SM-5000 Station Monitor.
EXT SPKR Jack
This 3.5-mm, 2-contact jack provides receiving audio
output from the VFO-A and VFO-B receivers for an
external loudspeaker or speakers, such as the SP-2000.
Inserting a plug into the jack disables the internal loudspeaker. Impedance is 4 ~ 8 Ohms.
E.ALC Switch
This slide switch is used to select the ALC gain; it is
normally set to position “1”. Slide the switch to position “2”, if the ALC gain is too high for the connected
linear amplifier.
Page 34
TRV Jack
This RCA jack provides a low level RF output for use
with a transverter. Maximum output is approximately
–10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms.
In the UK version, 135.7 - 137.8 kHz TX signal is
output from this terminal. Output level is +10 dBm at
50 Ohms.
EXT ALC Jack
This RCA input jack accepts negative-going external
ALC (Automatic Level Control) voltage from a linear
amplifier, to prevent over-excitation by the transceiver.
Acceptable input voltage range is 0 to –4 VDC.
TX GND Jack
This RCA jack is closed to ground while the transmitter is engaged. It may be used for control of a peripheral device, most typically a linear amplifier. To enable the jack, set Menu item “173 TGEN ETX-GND”
ENABLE
to the “ENABLE
ENABLE”.
The relay circuit used for this jack is capable of switching an AC voltage of 100 Volts at up to 300 mA, or a
DC voltage of 60 V at 200 mA, or DC 30 V at up to 1
Amp.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
MIC (PATCH) Jack
Circuit Breaker Switch
This RCA input jack accepts either AFSK or voice
audio, for transmission. This line is mixed with the microphone audio input line, so the microphone should
be disconnected if using this jack and mixing is not
desired. The optimum impedance is 500 ~ 600 Ohms,
and the nominal input level should be 5 mV.
This circuit breaker shuts off in the event of dangerously high current consumption by the transceiver.
ADVICE:
If the Circuit Breaker interrupts power, by all means
try to determine the cause of the over-current condition before re-applying power. To restore the Circuit
Breaker after verifying that all is normal, push the
switch in until you hear a “click”.
REC Jack
This RCA jack provides low-level receiver audio output and transmit (monitor) audio (requires the [MONI]
button is turned on), for external recording or external
amplification. Peak signal level is 30 mVp-p at 10 kOhms.
TX REQ Jack
~AC IN Jack
Connect the supplied 3-wire AC line cord to this socket.
AC voltages of 100-240 V may be accommodated by
the transceiver without any sort of modification (universal voltage input).
When this RCA jack is shorted to ground, it puts the
transceiver into the transmit mode, and sends out a
steady CW carrier, for linear amplifier or manual antenna tuner adjustment.
μ-TUNE Jack
+13.8 V Jack
This 8-pin MINI-DIN jack accepts a cable connected
to an optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit or
SM-5000 Station Monitor.
This RCA output jack provides regulated, separately
fused 13.8 VDC at up to 200 mA, to power an external
device such as a packet TNC. Make sure your device
does not require more current (if it does, use a separate
power source).
KEY Jack
This 1/4-inch, 3-contact jack accepts a CW key or keyer
paddle. Key-up voltage is +5 V, and key-down current
is 1 mA. Plug wiring is shown on page 15, and the jack
may be configured for keyer, “Bug,” “straight key,” or
computer keying interface operation via Menu item
“059 A1A R-TYPE.”
NOTE:
You cannot use a 2-contact plug in this jack (to do
so produces a constant “key down” condition).
Main Power Switch
This is the main power “on” (I)/“off” (O) switch of the
transceiver. Always turn this switch on before turning
on the front panel [POWER] button.
If this switch is not turned “on”, the front panel
[POWER] switch will not function.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
This 10-pin MINI-DIN jack is used for control of the
optional RF μTuning Kits.
DMU Jack
CAT Jack
This 9-pin serial DB-9 jack allows external computer
control of the transceiver. Connect a serial cable here
and to the RS-232C COM port on your personal computer (no external interface is required).
PGM (PROGRAM) Switch
This slide switch is used for updating the transceiver’s
firmware. The update software and instructions are
available for download from the Vertex Standard
website (http://www.yaesu.com/).
REMOTE Jack
By plugging the supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad into this jack, direct access to the CPU is provided,
for control of functions such as the audio playback feature, and the contest memory keyer, plus frequency and
function control.
Page 35
FH-2 SWITCHES
The supplied Remote Control Keypad “FH-2” can be used to control the voice memory capability for the SSB/AM/FM
modes, and the contest memory keyer for the CW mode. You can also play-back up to 15 seconds of incoming received
audio, for verification of a missed callsign or other purposes. Some specific capabilities of the FH-2 are:
 On SSB/AM/FM modes, five channels of storage and playback of voice memory (20 seconds each), using your own
voice for recording (see page 80).
 On CW mode, the FH-2 provides storage and recall of CW messages for repetitive CQ and contest number transmissions (see pages 94 and 96).
 Play-back of the last 15 seconds of incoming receiver audio (see page 45).
LOCK
ON
OFF
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5] Switches
[P/B] Switch
These buttons work as the Voice Memory and CW Message Memory Selection Key.
In the case of Voice Memory, up to 20 seconds of audio may be stored on each channel.
For CW Messages and CW Text Messages, up to 50
characters (“PARIS” specification) may be stored into
each channel.
This button is used for playing back the last 15 seconds of recorded receiver audio.
[], [], [], [] Switches
[MEM] Switch
Usually, these buttons are used for tuning the VFO frequency. Press the []/[] buttons to change the frequency in the same increments as the microphone [UP]/
[DWN] switches. Press the []/[] buttons to change
the frequency by 100 kHz steps.
When programming the Contest Memory Keyer, these
buttons are used to move the cursor and select the text
characters.
Press this button to store either a Voice Memory, or a
Contest Keyer Memory.
Page 36
[LOCK] Switch
This button may be used to lock out the FH-2 key buttons, to prevent accidental activation of FH-2 operations.
[DEC] Switch
When utilizing the sequential contest number capability of the Contest Keyer, press this button to decrement (decrease) the current Contest Number by one
digit (i.e. to back up from #198 to #197, etc.).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Before turning on main power, please verify the following precautions once more.




Verify all ground connections are secure. See page 9 for details.
Connect the antenna(s) to the rear-panel Antenna jack(s). See page 10 for details.
Connect the microphone (and/or key or paddle). See pages 11 and 12 for details.
If using a linear amplifier, verify the interconnections have been successfully completed? See pages 13 and 14 for
details.
 Rotate both [AF GAIN] controls to their fully counter-clockwise positions, to avoid a loud blast of audio when the
transceiver turns on. See page 21 for details.
 Rotate the [RF PWR] control fully counter-clockwise, to set minimum power to begin. See page 20 for details.
 If your AC mains power should suffer a significant fluctuation or interruption, we recommend that you go through a
complete power-up cycle, in order to ensure that all circuits are properly initialized. To do this, be sure the front panel
[POWER] switch is turned off, then set the rear panel main power switch to the “O” position. Now unplug the AC
cable from the rear panel, and wait ten seconds before continuing with the start-up procedure described on the next
page.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 37
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
Here is the typical start-up procedure for normal operation:
(VFO-B)[SQL] Knob
[POWER] Switch
[ANTENNA] Buttons
(VFO-A)[RX] Button
(VFO-A)[SQL] Knob
(VFO-B)[AF GAIN] Knob
(VFO-A)[AF GAIN] Knob
1. Plug the AC cable back in, set the rear
panel main power switch to the “I”
position.
2. Press and hold in the front panel
[POWER] switch for one second to turn
the transceiver on.
3. The transceiver will start up on 7.000.00
MHz LSB, and normal operation may begin.
NOTE:
To turn power off, press and hold in the front panel
[POWER] switch for one second.
4. Rotate the ( VFO-A )[ AF GAIN ]
knob to set a comfortable audio level
on incoming signals or noise. Clockwise rotation of the (VFO-A)[AF
GAIN] knob increases the volume
level.
NOTE:
When using headphones, start by rotating the (VFOA)[AF GAIN] knob counter-clockwise, then bring the
volume level up after you put the headphones on. This
will minimize the chance of damage to your hearing
caused by an unexpectedly-high audio level.
5. Press the ( VFO-A )[ RX ]
button to engage the VFOA receiver; the imbedded
LED will glow green.
ADVICE:
 If you press the (VFOA)[RX] button when the LED is already glowing
green, the LED will begin blinking; this indicates
that the VFO-A receiver is temporarily muted. Press
the (VFO-A) [RX] button once more to restore
VFO-A receiver operation.
Page 38
[()DOWN] /[()UP] Buttons
[FAST] Button
[BAND] Buttons
Main Tuning Dial knob (VFO-B)[RX] Button
[MODE] Buttons
[BAND/MHz] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
 Press the (VFO-B)[RX] button to
engage Dual Reception (using the
VFO-B receiver in addition to the
VFO-A receiver). When you press
the ( VFO-B )[ RX ] button, it will
glow green; pressing the button
once more will turn the VFO-B
receiver off, and the LED will go
dark. Use the ( VFO-B )[ AF
GAIN] knob to adjust the VFOB receiver volume level.
6. Press the [ BAND ] button
corresponding to the Amateur band you wish to operate on.
ADVICE:
 One-touch selection of
each Amateur band between 1.8 and 50 MHz is provided.
 The FTDX5000 utilizes a triple band-stack VFO
selection technique. This permits you to store up to
three favorite frequencies and modes for each band
in the VFO registers. For example, you may store
one frequency for 14 MHz CW, one for RTTY, and
one for USB, then recall each VFO by successive,
momentary presses of the [14] MHz band button.
Each Amateur band button has three frequency/
mode settings associated with it.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
 If you press the
[BAND/MCH ] button briefly, the button
glows red, and the
[ CLAR ( VFO-B )]
knob may be used as
the band selection
knob.
7. Press the [(DOWN)]/[(UP)] buttons to tune the
VFO-A frequency in 1 MHz
steps.
ADVICE:
You may change the tuning step to 100 kHz via Menu
item “145 TUN MHz SEL”. See page 133.
8. Move the [ANT 1-4] button up or down to select the
appropriate antenna for the band in use. Alternatively,
you may also press the [RX ANT] button to select the
receive antenna, if one is connected. Up to four TX/RX antennas and one RX-only antenna may
be connected.
ADVICE:
 Your antenna selection is “remembered” (in conjunction with the frequency and mode) in the VFO
register in use, when you choose that particular
antenna.
 When VFO-A and VFO-B are switched to the same
antenna jack, VFO-B receiver will be automatically
connected to the RX ANT jack.
 When both VFO-A and VFO-B are switched to the
RX ANT, the signal output from the RX OUT jack
is connected to the VFO-A receiver.
9. Press the appropriate [MODE]
button to select the desired operating mode.
ADVICE:
 By convention in the Amateur bands, LSB is used on
the 7 MHz and lower bands
(with the exception of 60 meters), while USB is
utilized on the 14 MHz and higher bands.
 When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will
observe a frequency shift on the display. This shift
represents the BFO offset between the “zero beat”
frequency and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can
hear (the pitch is programmed by the [PITCH]
knob), even though the actual tone that you hear is
not changing. If you do not want this frequency shift
to appear when changing modes, you may change
the BFO offset setting in Menu item “066 A1A FRQ
DISP”, described on page 127.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
 When operating on the FM mode
in the VFO-A, rotate the (VFOA)[SQL] (Squelch) knob clockwise just to the point where the
background noise is silenced. This
is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak signals. Excessive advancement of the
Squelch knob will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect weak
signals. Adjustment of the VFO-B
Squelch is accomplished using the
(VFO-B)[SQL] knob.
10. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to tune around the
band, and begin normal operation.
ADVICE:
 Clockwise rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob
increases the operating frequency, one “step” of the
synthesizer at a time; similarly, counter-clockwise
rotation of the Main Tuning Dial knob will decrease
the frequency.
A “normal” and a “fast”
step choice is available on
each operating mode.
Pressing the [FAST] button engages the “Fast”
tuning selection.
OPERATING MODE
1 STEP
LSB, USB, CW,
10Hz
[100Hz]
RTTY, PKT(LSB)
AM, FM, PKT(FM) 100Hz [1kHz]
[ ] : [FAST] switch set to “ON”
1 DIAL
ROTATION
10kHz
[100kHz]
100kHz [1MHz]
 It is possible to set the frequency dial rotation steps
separately, solely for CW mode operation, using
Menu items “143 TUN DIAL STP”, and “144 TUN
CW FINE”. See page 133.
 If you want to navigate frequency change quickly,
there are several techniques available:
 Direct keyboard entry of the frequency (see page
49).
 Use of the microphone [UP]/[DWN] scanning
keys, if your microphone is so equipped (see
page 49).
ANTENNA CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
ANT “1”
Transmitter
Section
TX/RX RELAY
ANT “2”
ANT “3”
ANT “4”
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-A)
Divider
VFO-A
Receiver
SEPARATE
RX ANT
BPF
RX OUT
SEPARATE
VFO-B
Receiver
ANTENNA SWITCH
RX ANTENNA SWITCH
(VFO-B)
(VFO-B)
Page 39
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
CLAR (CLARIFIER) OPERATION ON VFO-A
The [RX CLAR/FAST], [CLEAR], [TX CLAR/LOCK] buttons, and the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob are used to offset the
receive, the transmit, or both frequencies from their settings on VFO-A (the Clarifier does not affect VFO-B). The four
small numbers on the LCD display show the current Clarifier offset. The Clarifier controls on the FTDX5000 are designed
to allow you to preset an offset up to ±9.999 kHz without actually retuning, and then activate it usning the Clarifier [RX
CLAR/FAST] and [TX CLAR/LOCK] buttons. This feature is ideal for following a drifting station, or for setting the small
frequency offsets sometimes utilized in DX “Split” operation.
Here is the technique for utilizing the Clarifier:
1. Press the [RX CLAR/FAST] button. The “
” and
“
” icons will appear in the display, and the programmed offset will be applied to
the receive frequency.
ADVICE:
If the “
” and “
” icons do not appear, check
[
]
to see if the A/B button glows orange. If so, press the
[A/B] button to cause the LED in the [A/B] button to
go out. Now, press the [RX CLAR/FAST] button to
begin clarifier operation.
2. Rotation of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob will allow you
to modify the initial offset on the
fly. Offsets of up to ±9.999 kHz
may be set using the Clarifier.
To cancel Clarifier operation, press the [RX CLAR/FAST]
button. The “
” and “
” icons will disappear from
the display.
ADVICE:
Turning the clarifier “off” simply cancels the application
of the programmed offset from the receive and/or transmit
frequencies. To clear out the programmed clarifier offset
altogether, and reset it to “zero,” press the [CLEAR] button.
[CLEAR] Button
[A/B] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
[RX CLAR/FAST] Button
TX CLAR
Without changing the receive frequency, you may
alternatively apply the Clarifier offset to the transmit frequency (typically, for “split” DX pile-ups).
See page 82 for details.
The Tuning Offset Indicator provides a graphical representation of the Clarifier offset.
In CW mode, the Tuning Offset Indicator is depicts the CW Center Tuning, instead of the Clarifier Offset, this is the
factory default setting. If you wish to change this, so that the Clarifier Offset is also displayed on CW, use the
following procedure:
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select
Menu item “012 DISP BAR SEL”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B )[ SELECT ] knob to select
CLAR (Clarifier)” (replacing the default “CW
CW
“CLAR
TUNE (CW TUNING)”
selection).
[Plus (+) Offset]
4. Press and hold in the
[MENU] button for two
[Zero Offset]
seconds to save the new
setting and exit to normal operation.
(Minus (–) Offset)
Page 40
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
BASIC OPERATION:RECEIVING ON AMATEUR BANDS
LOCK
You may lock the setting of the Main Tuning Dial knob, to prevent accidental frequency change.
To lock out the Main Tuning Dial knob, just press the
[LOCK] button that is located to the right of the Main
Tuning Dial knob. To unlock the Dial setting, and restore
normal tuning, just press the [LOCK] button once more.
[LOCK] Button
When the Main Tuning Dial knob is “locked”, the blue
“
” icon will appear on the display.
DIM
The illumination level of the analog meter and frequency display may be reduced, if you are using the transceiver in a dark
environment where high brightness is not desired.
To reduce the illumination level, press the [DIM] button,
located to the left of the analog meter. To restore full brightness, press the [DIM] button once more.
[LOCK] Button
ADVICE:
The amount of brightness may be customized for different
front panel areas. The follwing menu settings are effective
when the [DIM] button is depresses:
008 DISP DIM MTR:
009 DISP DIM VFD:
010 DISP DIM OEL:
011 DISP DIM ELCD:
for analog meter
for frequency dispaly
SUB DISPLAY windows
for Spectrum Scope display
of the optional SM-5000 Station Monitor
OPERATION ON 60-METER (5 MHZ) BAND (U.S. AND U.K. VERSIONS ONLY)
The 60-meter frequencies have been incorporated into the FTDX5000 using fixed memory channels. These channels are set to
P-9U
USB or CW (U.S. version only), and they appear between the “last” PMS channel (“P-9U
P-9U”) and the first “regular” memory
channel (Channel 1).
To operate on the 60-meter (5 MHz) band:
[BAND/MCH] Button
1. Press the [V/M] button once, if necessary, to enter the
“Memory” mode (the “
” icon will appear on the
display.
2. Press and hold in the [BAND/MCH] button for two
seconds. The button will glow yellow to signify that
rotation of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob will allow selection of the memory channel.
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
US-0
US-9
3. Memory channels “US-0
US-0” through “US-9
US-9” (U.S. ver[V/M] Button
US-1
US-7
sion), or “US-1
US-1” through “US-7
US-7” (U.K. version), are
pre-programmed at the factory with the permitted freCHANNEL
FREQUENCY/MODE
NUMBER
U.S. VERSION
U.K. VERSION
quencies in the 5 MHz band. The USB mode is autoUS-1
5.332000 MHz (USB)
5.260000 MHz (USB)
US-1
USmatically selected for channels “US-1
US-1” through “USUS-2
5.348000 MHz (USB)
5.280000 MHz (USB)
5” (U.S. version), or “US-1
US-1
US-7
US-1” through “US-7
US-7” (U.K.
US-3
5.358500 MHz (USB)
5.290000 MHz (USB)
US-4
5.373000 MHz (USB)
5.368000 MHz (USB)
version). The CW mode is automatically selected on
US-5
5.405000 MHz (USB)
5.373000 MHz (USB)
US-6
US-0
channels “US-6
US-6” through “US-0
US-0” (U.S. version).
US-6
5.332000 MHz (CW)
5.400000 MHz (USB)
4. To exit from 60-meter operation and return to the VFO
US-7
5.348000 MHz (CW)
5.405000 MHz (USB)
US-8
5.358500 MHz (CW)
—
mode, just press the [V/M] button.
NOTE:
The operating frequencies and modes for 5 MHz band operation are both fixed, and may not be changed.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
US-9
US-0
5.373000 MHz (CW)
5.405000 MHz (CW)
—
—
Page 41
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
DUAL RECEIVE
The FTDX5000 is capable of simultaneous reception, using the VFO-A and VFO-B receivers, in what is called the “Dual
Receive” mode. This is especially useful for DX work, here is the operating procedure for Dual Receive operation.
1. While receiving on VFO-A, engage the VFO-B receiver
by pressing the (VFO-B)[RX] button, located to the
upper left of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob. You will now
be receiving on the two frequencies shown on the LCD
display (for VFO-A) and SUB DISPLAY-I (for VFOB).
2. Adjusting the volume:
To adjust the VFO-A audio level, rotate the (VFOA)[AF GAIN] knob. To adjust the VFO-B audio level,
rotate the (VFO-B)[AF GAIN] knob. In both cases,
clockwise rotation of the knob will increase the volume level.
3. Press the [B] button, located to the upper left of the
Main Tuning Dial knob. The [B] button will glow orange, and you may now change the operating mode of
the VFO-B receiver by pressing the appropriate
[MODE] selection button.
4. You may also press the [BAND] buttons to select the
operating band for the VFO-B receiver.
5. To return the mode and band selections to VFO-A, press
the [A] button, located to the left of the [B] button.
The [A] button will glow red, and you may now change
the operating mode and band of the VFO-A receiver.
6. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the Main
VFO-A frequency, and rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob to adjust the VFO-B frequency.
ADVICE:
If the VFO-B frequency does not change, check to see
if the orange LED in the [A/B] button is illuminated. If
not, pressing the [A/B] button will cause the [A/B] button to glow orange. Now, rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob to adjust the VFO-B frequency.
7. To cancel Dual Receive operation, and receive only
on the VFO-A receiver, press the (VFO-B)[RX] button; the imbedded green LED will go out, and
monoband operation on the VFO-A receiver will resume.
NOTE:
Remember that, while the [B] button glows orange, any
mode or band changes will still be applied to the VFO-B
receiver, whether or not Dual Receive is engaged.
Page 42
[A] / [B] Buttons
(VFO-B)[SQL] Knob
[BAND] Buttons
[MODE] Buttons
(VFO-A)[SQL] Knob
SUB DISPLAY-I
(VFO-B)[AF GAIN] Knob
[A/B] Button
(VFO-B)[RX] Button
(VFO-A)[AF GAIN] Knob
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
QUICK POINT:
By convention in the amateur bands, LSB is used on the 7
MHz and lower bands (with the exception of 60 meters),
while USB is utilized on the 14 MHz and higher bands.
ADVICE:
 When operating in Dual Receive, the manner in which
the audio is fed to the left and right headphones (Stereo, Monaural, or Mixed) may be configured using
Menu item “108 ROUT HEADPHN” (see page 130).
 When changing modes from SSB to CW, you will observe a frequency shift on the display. This shift represents the BFO offset between the “zero beat” frequency
and the audible CW pitch (tone) you can hear (the pitch
is programmed by the [PITCH] knob), even though
the actual tone that you hear is not changing. If you do
not want this frequency shift to appear when changing
modes, you may change the BFO offset setting in Menu
item “066 A1A FRQ DISP”, described on page 127.
 When operating on the FM mode on the VFO-B receiver, rotate the (VFO-B)[SQL] knob clockwise just
to the point where the background noise is silenced.
This is the point of maximum sensitivity to weak signals. Excessive advancement of the (VFO-B)[SQL]
knob will degrade the ability of the receiver to detect
weak signals. Adjustment of the VFO-A squelch is accomplished using the (VFO-A)[SQL] knob.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
DUAL RECEIVE
Using Headphones for Dual Receive
Sideband Diversity Reception
To take advantage of dual reception, you will want to connect stereo headphones to the PHONES jack. In addition
to the AF GAIN controls, headphone audio mixing can
also be configured as desired from Menu item “108 ROUT
HEADPHN”. Three audio mixing schemes are selectable
as follows:
Here you receive a single AM signal through the two receivers, each receiving the opposite sideband. Skywavepropagated signals often show phase distortion in this
mode, but it gives you a view of the entire passband, from
which you can then select the best sideband for listening
(or for SWL Dx’ing, you may want to listen to both sidebands at the same time, to get the best copy). On
groundwave signals, where the phase of the sidebands is
likely to be the same, there is an interesting sense of depth
to the signal.
SEPARETE
SEPARETE: Audio from the VFO-A receiver is heard only
in the left ear, and VFO-B receiver audio
solely in the right ear.
CONBINE1
CONBINE1: Audio from both VFO-A and VFO-B receivers can be heard in both ears, but VFO-B
audio is attenuated in the left ear and VFOA audio is attenuated in the right ear.
CONBINE2
CONBINE2: Audio from both VFO-A and VFO-B receivers are combined and heard equally in both
ears (“Monaural” mode).
VFO Tracking Feature
You may lock VFO-B to track in unison with VFO-A when
the main tuning dial is adjusted. See page 84 for details.
Go to Menu item “038 GENE TRACK” to set the tracking function as follows:
OFF
OFF: VFO-A and VFO-B tune independently (Default)
BAND
BAND: Band Change operations will be applied to VFOA and VFO-B simultaneously.
FREQ
FREQ: VFO-A and VFO-B tune in unison when The Main
Tuning dial is adjusted. However, VFO-B may
be adjusted separately.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
To tune in a signal using this mode, you should have stereo headphones connected to the front panel PHONES
jack.
 Set VFO-A to either LSB or USB mode, and tune for
zero beat on the desired signal.
 Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and frequency into VFO-B, then press the [MODE] button to
select the opposite sideband for VFO-A.
 If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
CONBINE1
to the “CONBINE1
CONBINE1” mode via Menu item “108 ROUT
HEADPHN”, and activate dual reception.
 Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume
of the two receivers.
 If interference is present on one of the channels, you
may have to turn its [AF GAIN] knob to suppress that
channel (or press the green [RX] button to disable the
receiver with the sideband experiencing interference).
Otherwise, try changing the headphone audio mixing
CONBINE2
SEPARETE
scheme to “CONBINE2
CONBINE2” or “SEPARETE
SEPARETE” in the Menu
item “108 ROUT HEADPHN”, for different effects
(or try settings with similar effects, if you use an external audio amplifier). Although you don’t get the “stereophonic” effect in the monaural mode, the two signals are still mixed, offering the potential for much
better copy than in regular AM or even single-sideband ECSS modes.
Page 43
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
DUAL RECEIVE
Bandwidth Diversity Reception
This mode involves receiving the same signal through two
different bandpass filters. The frequency and mode of both
VFO-A and VFO-B are the same. VFO-A can be set up for
a wide bandpass, using the [WIDTH] knobs, and VFO-B
for a narrow bandpass, resulting in a spatial perception of
the channel. Although any mode (except FM) can be used,
CW offers the widest array of choices, and perhaps the
most startling effects on crowded channels.
Stereo headphones or external stereo speakers are recommended for this mode. To set up the transceiver for bandwidth diversity reception:
 Select the desired mode on VFO-A.
 Tune to the signal of interest.
 Press the [A B] button to copy this mode and frequency into the VFO-B.
 If using headphones, set the headphone mixing scheme
CONBINE1
to the “CONBINE1
CONBINE1” mode via Menu item “108 ROUT
HEADPHN”, and activate dual reception.
 Adjust the [AF GAIN] knob(s) to balance the volume
of the two receivers.
 Now try manipulating the [SHIFT] and [WIDTH]
knobs to observe the interesting effects of bandwidth
diversity.
Page 44
Polarity Diversity
Similar in concept to the bandwidth diversity just
described, another interesting capability of the
FTDX5000 dual reception, is the ability to use two
different antennas on the same frequency. For example, you might have a horizontal Yagi on the main
band, and a vertical antenna on the sub band, then
lock the two frequencies together and engage dual
reception.
Frequently, the fading observed on the HF bands is
not so much a change in ionization level, but rather
a shift in the polarization of the signal as it travels
to and from the ionosphere. Having an oppositepolarization antenna available can fill in the signal
during deep fades. You may then transmit on whichever antenna is providing the strongest signal at the
moment (see the discussion below on Split Frequency operation).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
P.BACK (AUDIO PLAYBACK) FROM MAIN (VFO-A) RECEIVER
When Audio Playback is engaged by the operator, the FTDX5000 begins automatically recording the last 15 seconds of
incoming receiver audio on VFO-A. Recording is controlled with the supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, plugged into
the rear panel REMOTE jack. This capability is especially useful for confirming a callsign that may have been difficult to
copy due to noise or QRM, etc.
Recording
Playback
 Press and hold in the FH-2’s [P/B] key for two seconds to initiate recording. The “
” icon will appear in the display to confirm that recording is in
progress.
 Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key briefly to halt recording;
the “
” icon will go out.
 Press the FH-2’s [P/B] key briefly, after recording has
been halted, to begin playback of the recorded audio;
the “
” icon will appear in the display to confirm
that playback is in progress. The last 15 seconds of
audio will be heard in the speaker or headphones. If
you do not intervene, the entire 15 seconds will be
played back, repeating endlessly.
 To halt playback at any time, just press the [P/B] key
briefly again. The next time you press the [P/B] key, it
will pick up the playback where you left off.
LOCK
ON
OFF
ADVICE
You may adjust the playback level of the recording with
the main [AF GAIN] knob.
Stop
Start
15 Seconds
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 45
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
“MY BANDS” OPERATION
When operating on an amateur band, it is possible to use the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to change the selected operating band.
The “My Bands” feature allows you to designate several amateur bands, and make only those bands available for selection
with the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
This feature can be very useful in a contest, where the 10/18/24 MHz bands are not used, or if you do not have antennas for
some bands.
“My Bands” Setup
1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “151 TUN MY BAND”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to choose a band
that you wish to skip (omit) from the band-selection
loop (when using the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob for band
selection). The available choices are 1.8M/3.5M/7M/
10M/14M/18M/21M/24M/28M/50M/GEN(General
Band)/T14M(Transverter “1”)/T28M(Transverter
“2”)/T50M(Transverter “3”).
4. Press the [ENT] button (one of the [BAND] buttons)
ON
to set the selected band to “skipped”. The “ON
ON” notation at the right of the band notation will change to
OFF
“OFF
OFF”.
ON
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select (“ON
ON”) or deselect
OFF
(“OFF
OFF”) as many bands as you like.
6. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to lock in the new configuration and exit to normal
operation.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
ADVICE:
The “My Band” feature affects only VFO-A band.
“My Band” Operation
1. Press the [V/M] button once, if neccessary, to enter the
“VFO” mode.
2. Press the [BAND/MCH] button briefly; the button will
glow Red.
3. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to choose the amateur band on which you wish to operate. Only those
amateur bands that have not been skipped will appear
as you scroll through the bands.
[BAND/MCH] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
[V/M] Button
1.8 MHz
3.5 MHz
5 MHz
7 MHz
7 MHz
10 MHz
3.5 MHz
14 MHz
7 MHz
18 MHz
14 MHz
21 MHz
21 MHz
24 MHz
28 MHz
3.5 MHz
14 MHz
21 MHz
28 MHz
28 MHz
50 MHz
Page 46
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
BAND STACK OPERATION
The FTDX5000 utilizes a triple band-stack VFO selection technique that permits you to store up to three favorite frequencies and modes onto each band’s VFO register. For example, you may store one frequency each on 14 MHz CW, RTTY, and
USB, then recall each VFO by successive, momentary presses of the [14] MHz band button. Each Amateur band key may
similarly have up to three frequency/mode settings applied. Both the VFO-A and VFO-B systems have their own, independent, band stacks.
A typical setup, for the 14 MHz band, might be arranged
like this:
[BAND] Button
1. Program 14.025 MHz, CW Mode, then press the [14]
MHz band button;
2. Program 14.080 MHz, RTTY Mode, then press the [14]
MHz band button;
3. Program 14.195 MHz, SSB Mode, then press the [14]
MHz band button.
With this configuration, successive momentary presses of
the [14] MHz band button will allow you to toggle sequentially through these three VFO configurations.
USB
RTTY
CW
C.S (CUSTOM SWITCH)
An often-used Menu mode selection may be programmed to the front panel [C.S] button.
C.S Setup
1. Press the [MENU] button to engage the Menu mode;
the Menu list will appear on the SUB DISPLAY windows.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select the
Menu item you want to be able to access via the [C.S]
button.
3. Press and hold in the [C.S] button for two seconds to
lock in your selection.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new configuration and exit to normal operation.
[C.S] Button [MENU] Button (VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
Menu Selection Recall via [C.S] button
1. Press the [C.S] button. The programmed Menu item
will appear on the display.
2. You may now rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to
change the setting of this menu item.
3. Press the [MENU] button for two seconds, when you
are done, to save the new configuration and exit to
normal operation.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[C.S] Button [MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Page 47
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
ROTATOR CONTROL FUNCTIONS
When using a YAESU model G-800DXA, G-1000DXA, G-2800DXA (for USA/EXP market) or G-800DXC, G1000DXC, G-2800DXC (for European market) Antenna Rotator (not supplied), it is possible to control it from the front
panel of the FTDX5000.
[3.5(2)], [7(3)] Button
[14(5)], [18(6)] Button
1 Press and hold in the [ENT] button (one of the [BAND]
buttons) for two seconds. The SUB DISPLAY windows will change, and display the “Rotator Control”
configuration.
2 Press either the [3.5(2)] button or the [7.0(3)] button
to rotate the antenna. Pressing the [3.5(2)] button will
cause rotation to the left (counter-clockwise), while
pressing the [7.0(3)] button will cause rotation to the
right (clockwise).
3 Press the [14(5)] button or the [18(6)] button to control the speed of rotation. Pressing the [14(5)] button
will cause slower rotation, while pressing the [18(6)]
button will speed up rotation. Usually, you will be using the “100%” setting.
[ENT] Button
Counter-clockwise Rotation Clockwise Rotation
When you are through exercising rotator control, press the
[ENT] button briefly. The SUB DISPLAY windows will
return to the normal display.
Speed Down Speed Up
IMPORTANT NOTE
~AC IN
OPTIONAL CONNECTION CABLE (T9101556)
Page 48
OPERATION
ADJ . MODE
MODE
SELECT
SWITCH
FULL
SCALE
ADJ
OVERLAP
LED ADJ
A
B
OUT VOL
ADJ
PRESET
ADJ
REMOTE
CONTROL
ROT
EXT
CONTROL
EXT CONTROL
ANT 2
ANT 1
 Set the FTDX5000 to match the starting point
of your rotator control indicator needle via
Menu item “014 DISP RTR STU”. The default
0°
setting is “0°
0°” (north). If your controller starting point is south, the Menu item “014 DISP
180°
RTR STU” must be set to “180°
180°”. If not set
properly the FTDX5000 display will not show
the correct direction.
 When the rotator control indicator needle does
not indicate the precise antenna direction, adjust the indicator needle precisely to the antenna
direction via Menu item “015 DISP RTR ADJ”.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
MORE FREQUENCY NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES
Keyboard Frequency Entry
Using the [(DOWN)]/[(UP)] Buttons
You may enter operating frequencies, for either the VFOA or VFO-B bands, using the front panel band/frequency
selection keys.
 To tune the VFO-A frequency in 100 kHz step. Press
the [ (UP)] or [ (DOWN)]
button.
 To tune the VFO-B frequency in 100 kHz step. Press
the [B] button first (The [B] button will glow orange),
then press the [(UP)] or [(DOWN)] button.
ADVICE:
You may change the tuning step of the [  ( UP )]/
[(DOWN)] buttons to 1 MHz via the Menu item “145
TUN MHz SEL”. See page 133.
Example 1: Enter 14.250.000 MHz into VFO-A
1. Press the [ENT] button to engage the direct frequency
entry process. Now, beginning with the “10
MHz” digit of the frequency (the leftmost
digit), we will enter the
required digits of the frequency.
2. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequencyentry digit or decimal point on the right side of the
slash bar). In this example, enter
[1.8/1]  [10/4] [GEN/.]  [3.5/2] 
[14/5]  [50/0]  [50/0]  [50/0]  [50/0]
The decimal point after the “MHz” portion of the frequency must be entered, but no decimal point is required after the “kHz” portion.
3. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will
confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
the new operating frequency will appear on the Main
(VFO-A) frequency display fields.
Example 2: Enter 7.100.000 MHz into VFO-B
1. Press the [B] button, located to the upper left of
the Main Tuning Dial
knob. The [ B ] button
will glow orange.
2. Press the [ENT] button
to engage the direct frequency entry process. Now,
beginning with the “10 MHz” digit of the frequency
(the leftmost digit), we will enter the required digits of
the frequency to be entered into the VFO-B register.
3. Press, in order, the digits of the operating frequency,
using the [BAND] buttons (which have the frequencyentry digit or decimal point on the right side of the
slash bar). In this example, enter
[21/7]  [GEN/.]  [1.8/1] 
[50/0]  [50/0]  [50/0]  [50/0]  [50/0]
4. Press the [ENT] button once more. A short “beep” will
confirm that the frequency entry was successful, and
the new operating frequency will appear on the VFOB frequency display, SUB DISPLAY-I window.
ADVICE:
If you attempt to enter a frequency outside the operating range of 30 kHz ~ 60 MHz, the microprocessor
will ignore the attempt, and you will be returned to
your previous operating frequency. If this happens,
please try again, taking care not to repeat the error in
the frequency entry process.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Using the [UP]/[DWN] Switches of the
Supplied MH-31B8 Hand Microphone
The [UP]/[DWN] switches on the supplied MH-31B8 Hand
Microphone may also be used for manually scanning upward or downward in frequency.
The microphone [UP]/[DWN] switches utilize the tuning
[FST] Button
steps of the Main Tuning Dial
[DWN] Button
[UP] Button
knob; moreover, when the microphone [ FA S T ] k e y i s
pressed, the tuning rate will change
to 100 Hz, similar to the effect of
the transceiver front-panel [FAST]
button.
DWN
ADVICE:
In the AM and FM modes, you may independently set the tuning steps when
using the [UP]/[DWN] switches. To set
new tuning steps, use Menu items “146
TUN AM STEP” and “147 TUN FM
STEP”.
FST
UP
DYNAMIC MICROPHONE
MH-31
Using the []/[]/[]/[] Switches of the
Supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
The [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] switches on the supplied FH-2
Remote Control Keypad may also be used for manually
changing of the VFO-A frequency.
Press the []/[] buttons to change
the frequency in the same increments
as the microphone [ UP ] / [ DWN ]
switches. Press the []/[] buttons to
change the frequency by 100 kHz
steps.
LOCK
ON
OFF
Page 49
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
RECEIVER OPERATION (FRONT END BLOCK DIAGRAM)
The FTDX5000 includes a wide range of special features to suppress the many types of interference that may be encountered on the HF bands. However, real world interference conditions are constantly changing, so optimum setting of the
controls is somewhat of an art, requiring familiarity with the types of interference and the subtle effects of some of the
controls. Therefore, the following information is provided as a general guideline for typical situations, and a starting point
for your own experimentation.
Yaesu provides the optional RF-μTUNING Unit (Narrow-bandwidth High-Q RF Filter) for additional protection from
strong signal interference.
VRF (SEE PAGE 54)
IF NOTCH (SEE PAGE 63)
On the 1.9 - 28 MHz amateur bands, Yaesu’s powerful
VRF (Variable RF Filter) preselector circuit provides excellent suppression of out-of-band interference. The passband is much narrower than that provided by traditional
fixed bandpass filters.
The IF Notch filter is a high-Q notch filter that can significantly reduce, or eliminate, an interfering carrier. The Q
(sharpness) of the filter may be adjusted using the Menu.
DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION) (SEE PAGE 64)
The DSP’s Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) feature utilizes sixteen different mathematical algorithms to analyze
and suppress different noise profiles encountered on the
HF/50 MHz bands. Choose the selection that provides the
best noise suppression, which concurrently will allow the
signal to rise up out of the noise.
R. FLT (IF Roofing Filters) (SEE PAGE 56)
On the VFO-A receiver, Roofing filters, in bandwidths of
15 kHz, 6 kHz, 3 kHz, 600Hz, and 300 Hz (optional in
some models), are provided in the 9 MHz First IF, right
after the first mixer. These filters provide narrow-band selectivity to protect the following IF and DSP stages. The
15 kHz, 6 kHz, or 3 kHz filters are automatically selected
for typical operating modes, and may be manually changed
by the operator, if desired, for special operating circumstances.
DNF (DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER) (SEE PAGE 64)
When multiple interfering carriers are encountered during
reception, the Digital Notch Filter can significantly reduce
the level of these signals.
AGC (SEE PAGE 67)
The VFO-B receiver 40 MHz IF includes three Roofing
filters, with bandwidths of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, and 3 kHz.
The AGC system is highly adaptable to changing signal
and fading characteristics, making reception possible under the most difficult conditions.
CONTOUR Filter (SEE PAGE 58)
The DSP Contour filter is a unique capability of the
FTDX5000, providing either nulling or peaking of tunable
segments of the receiver passband. The Contour filter can
suppress interference, or excessive frequency components
on an incoming signal, or it can peak those tunable frequency segments. The amount of nulling/peaking, and the
bandwidth over which it is applied, are adjustable via the
Menu.
SLOPED AGC (SEE PAGE 68)
Instead of limiting a wide range of audio output signals to
a fixed upper bound, the sloped AGC system actually allows the audio output to rise, very gently, with ever-increasing signal strength. This capability allows you to mentally separate signals, according to signal strength, in addition to slight frequency differences.
IF Filter Quality Adjustment (SEE PAGE 131)
IF SHIFT (SEE PAGE 60)
The passband center frequency response of the IF DSP
filtering may be adjusted using this control.
The “Q” (quality factor) of the IF DSP filters may be adjusted using the Menu.
IF WIDTH (SEE PAGE 61)
Variable IF Filter Shape Factor (SEE PAGE 131)
You may adjust the shape factor of the receiver IF DSP
filters using the Menu.
The width of the IF DSP filtering may be adjusted using
this control.
VFO-A Receiver
9 MHz
THRU
SCOPE
OPTION
ANTENNA SELECTOR
ATT
µ-TUNE
BPF
IF OUT
ROOFING
FILTER
1st
IF AMP
RF AMP/
IPO
300Hz
600Hz
3kHz
6kHz
15kHz
1st Local
VRF
2nd
IF AMP
DSP
UNIT
2nd Local
VFO-B Receiver
RF
1st IF
40.455 MHz
THRU
3rd IF (DSP)
2nd IF
455 kHz
30 kHz (SSB/CW)
24 kHz (AM/FM)
ROOFING
FILTER
ATT
VRF
BPF
1st
IF AMP
RF AMP/
IPO
1st Local
Page 50
2rd IF (DSP)
30 kHz (SSB/CW)
24 kHz (AM/FM)
1st IF
RF
3kHz
6kHz
15kHz
3rd
IF AMP
CF
2nd Local
DSP
UNIT
3rd Local
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
IPO (INTERCEPT POINT OPTIMIZATION)
The IPO feature allows the operator to optimize the characteristics of the receiver front end, depending on the current noise
level and the strength of incoming signals.
VFO-A IPO Setup
VFO-B IPO Setup
 Press the [A] button to activate VFO-A receiver (The
[A] button will glow red).
 Move the [IPO] knob up or down to set the desired
characteristic of the VFO-A receiver front end, per the
chart below.
 Press the [B] button to activate VFO-B receiver (The
[B] button will glow orange).
 Move the [IPO] knob up or down to set the desired
characteristic of the VFO-B receiver front end, per the
chart below.
AMP1
AMP1: Amplifies the incoming signal, using a low
distortion RF preamplifier (normally, the IPO
is set to this position).
AMP2
AMP2: Increases receiver sensitivity.
IPO1
IPO1:
Improves the IPO.
IPO2
IPO2:
Bypasses the RF preamplifier, yielding direct feed to the first mixer. As a result, the
IPO is improved more.
AMP1
AMP1: Amplifies the incoming signal, using a low
distortion RF preamplifier (normally, the IPO
is set to this position).
AMP2
AMP2: Increases receiver sensitivity.
IPO1
IPO1:
Improves the IPO.
The selected receiver RF preamplifier will be indicated
in the IPO column of the Block Diagram Display.
The selected receiver RF preamplifier will be indicated
in the IPO column of the Block Diagram Display.
 Press the [IPO] knob briefly, to quickly set the IPO to
“AMP1”.
[IPO] Knob
[IPO] Knob [A] Button
AMP1
IPO1
IPO2
AMP1
AMP
AMP2
 Press the [IPO] knob briefly, to quickly set the IPO to
“AMP1”.
[B] Button
AMP
AMP
AMP2
IPO1
AMP
IPO1
IPO2
ADVICE:
IPO
On the 10 MHz and lower bands, it generally is not necessary to use any preamplifier at all; selecting the “IPO
IPO” position as
described above will increase the strong-signal-handling capability of the receiver, and usually result in more pleasant
reception due to reduced noise. If you can hear band noise with the preamplifiers disengaged, then a preamplifier is generally not needed.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 51
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
ATT
Even with the IPO function on, extremely strong local signals or high noise can still degrade reception. In such situations,
you can use the [ATT] button to insert 6, 12, or 18-dB of RF attenuation in front of the RF amplifier.
VFO-A ATT Setup
VFO-B ATT Setup
 Press the [A] button to activate VFO-A receiver (The
[A] button will glow red).
 Move the [ATT] knob up or down to set the desired
attenuation level of the VFO-A receiver, per the chart
below.
OFF
OFF:
Attenuator is Off
6 dB
–6
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 6
dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/2)
12 dB
–12
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 12
dB (Signal voltage reduced to 1/4)
18 dB
–18
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 18
dB (Signal voltage reduced to 1/8)
The selected attenuation level will be indicated in the
ATT column of the Block Diagram Display.
 Press the [B] button to activate VFO-B receiver (The
[B] button will glow orange).
 Move the [ATT] knob up or down to set the desired
attenuation level of the VFO-B receiver, per the chart
below.
OFF
OFF:
Attenuator is Off
6 dB
–6
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 6
dB (Signal voltage reduced by 1/2)
12 dB
–12
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 12
dB (Signal voltage reduced to 1/4)
18 dB
–18
dB: The incoming signal power is reduced by 18
dB (Signal voltage reduced to 1/8)
The selected attenuation level will be indicated in the
ATT column of the Block Diagram Display.
 To quickly restore full signal strength through the Attenuator circuit, press the [ATT] knob in briefly to restore the ATT display to the “OFF”.
[ATT] Knob
[A] Button
 To quickly restore full signal strength through the Attenuator circuit, press the [ATT] knob in briefly to restore the ATT display to the “OFF”.
[ATT] Knob
[B] Button
ADVICE:
If background noise causes the S-meter to deflect on clear frequencies, move the [ATT] knob until the S-meter drops to
about “S-1”. This setting optimizes the trade-offs between sensitivity, noise, and interference immunity. Also, once you
have tuned in a station you want to work, you may want to reduce sensitivity further (or add more attenuation) by moving
the [ATT] knob to a greater setting. This reduces the strength of all signals (and noise) and can make reception more
comfortable, important especially during long QSOs. When looking for weak signals on a quiet band, you will want maxiOFF
mum sensitivity, so the IPO should be disabled and the [ATT] knob should be set to “OFF
OFF” by pressing the [ATT] knob. This
situation is typical during quiet times on frequencies above 21 MHz, and when using a small or negative-gain receiving
antenna on other bands.
Page 52
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
RF GAIN (SSB/CW/AM MODES)
The RF Gain controls permit manual adjustment of the receiver RF and IF stages gain levels, to account for noise and/or
signal strength conditions.
VFO-A Receiver RF GAIN Adjustment
VFO-B Receiver RF GAIN Adjustment
The (VFO-A)[RF GAIN] knob should, be rotated, initially,
to the clockwise position. This is the point of maximum
sensitivity, and counter-clockwise rotation will gradually
reduce the receiver RF gain.
The VFO-B receiver RF Gain operates identically to the
VFO-A receiver RF Gain.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RX] button to engage the Dual
Receive operation. The (VFO-B)[RX] button will glow
green.
 Always utilize the fully clockwise position of the (VFOB)[RF GAIN] knob as the starting point for operation.
(VFO-A)[RF GAIN] Knob
(VFO-B)[RF GAIN] Knob
(VFO-B)[RX] Button

ADVICE:
 As the [RF GAIN] knob is rotated counterclockwise
to reduce the gain, the S-meter reading will rise. This
indicates that the AGC voltage being applied to the
receiver is increasing (which causes a reduction in receiver gain).
 Rotating the [RF GAIN] knob control to the fully
counter-clockwise position will essentially disable the
receiver, as the gain will be greatly reduced. In this
case, as well, the S-meter will appear to be “pegged”
against the right edge of the analog S-meter scale.
 The (VFO-B)[RF GAIN] knob operates identically to
the (VFO-A)[RF GAIN] knob. The effects of counterclockwise rotation of the VFO-B receiver RF Gain
control may be observed visually on the VFO-B Smeter.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
QUICK POINT:
 Reception can often be optimized by rotating the [RF
GAIN] knob slightly counter-clockwise, to the point
where the S-meter stationary needles position is just
about the same as the receiver noise level. This setting
ensures incoming signals will be heard with minimal
noise. The S/N (signal to noise) of the receiver will be
improved, without so much gain reduction that weak
signals cannot be heard.
 The RF GAIN control, along with the IPO and ATT
(attenuator) features, all affect the system receiver gain
in different ways. As a first step in dealing with high
noise or a crowded, high-level signal environment, the
IPO generally should be the first feature engaged, if
the frequency is low enough to allow the preamplifier
to be bypassed. Thereafter, the RF GAIN and ATT (attenuator) features may be employed to provide precise, delicate adjustment of the receiver, and fully optimize performance.
Page 53
ADVANCED INTERFERENCE-SUPPRESSION FEATURES: RF FRONT END
The FTDX5000 includes an unmatched array of RF selectivity-enhancing features. Please study the following material
carefully, to understand the many interference tools and techniques completely.
USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER)
The VRF system is a high-performance RF front-end preselector that has a high Q factor and low insertion loss. VRF
provides outstanding rejection of out-of-band signals, it can also significantly improve receiver performance when located
near other transmitters, such as a contest or DX-pedition station. The FTDX5000 VRF system affects the 1.8 - 28 MHz
amateur bands only.
VFO-A VRF Setup
VFO-B VRF Setup
 Press the (VFO-A)[VRF] button. The button will glow
red, and the “
” icon will appear at the FLT column of the Block Diagram Display. The VRF system
will be engaged and centered on the currently operating amateur band. The (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob will
now function as the VRF adjusting knob.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RX] button to engage Dual Receive
operation. The button will glow green.
 Press the (VFO-B)[VRF] button. The (VFO-B)[VRF]
button will glows red, and the “
” icon will appear
at the FLT column of the Block Diagram Display. The
VRF system will be engaged and centered on the current operating amateur band. The (VFO-B)[SELECT]
knob will now function as the VRF adjusting knob.
 You may rotate the ( VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to
change the VRF system tuning, relative to your operating frequency.
ADVICE:
 You may observe the relative skew of the VRF system in the SUB DISPLAY-II. window.
 After moving the passband of the VRF system
manually, you may re-center it on the current Amateur band by pressing the (VFO-A)[RESET] button.
 To switch VRF off, press the (VFO-A)[VRF] button
until the “
” icon shows “
” in the FLT column of the Block Diagram Display; this confirms that
the VRF circuit has been removed from the incoming
received signal path.
(VFO-A)[VRF/μ-T] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
Page 54
 You may rotate the ( VFO-B )[ SELECT ] knob to
change the VRF system tuning, relative to your operating frequency.
ADVICE:
 You may observe the relative skew of the VRF system in the SUB DISPLAY-III window.
 After moving the passband of the VRF system
manually, you may re-center it on the current Amateur band by pressing the (VFO-B)[RESET] button.
 To switch VRF off, press the (VFO-B)[VRF] button.
The “
” icon shows “
” in the FLT column of
the Block Diagram Display; this confirms that the VRF
circuit has been removed from the incoming received
signal path.
(VFO-B)[VRF] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ADVANCED INTERFERENCE-SUPPRESSION FEATURES: RF FRONT END
USING THE VRF (VARIABLE RF FRONT-END FILTER)
ADVICE:
 The VRF system tuning is relatively broad, although it
is still much narrower than the fixed bandpass filter.
You may not hear much difference in the background
noise or signal quality when you make minor adjustments. However, if you have receiving problems associated with a very strong signal, rotation of the [SELECT] knob may help reduce the strength of the interfering station, allowing improved reception of the desired signal, if receiver overload was degrading reception.
 The VRF Filter operational status will be memorized
independently on each VFO in the VFO stack.
 You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB
DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item
“019 DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
QUICK POINT:
The VRF filter utilizes high-quality coils and capacitors
that provide high Q, and yield a passband that is approximately 20% to 30% the width of a traditional, fixed
bandpass filter. As a result, significantly more “unwanted”
signal rejection is provided. Within each amateur band,
the following adjustment steps are provided, if you wish
to skew the response in a particular direction to enhance
interference rejection even more. The actual “sound” of
the signal you are listening to will remain unchanged, however.
AMATEUR BAND
1.8 MHz
3.5 MHz
5 MHz
7 MHz
10 MHz
14 MHz
18 MHz
21 MHz
24.5 MHz
28 MHz
VRF ADJUSTMENT STEPS
62 steps
62 steps
62 steps
62 steps
30 steps
30 steps
20 steps
20 steps
20 steps
20 steps
Page 55
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS OFF FREQUENCY BY JUST A FEW KHZ)
R.FLT (ROOFING FILTERS)
Narrow-band Roofing Filters of 15 kHz, 6 kHz, 3 kHz, 600 Hz, and 300 Hz bandwidths are provided in the first IF, right
after the first mixer. These filters provide protection for the 2nd mixer, DSP, and other circuitry that follow. The roofing
filter can dramatically improve reception on a very crowded band (during a contest, etc.). Typically, the AUTO selection
mode is satisfactory for most operating situations, but in an extremely crowded phone or CW band you may wish to select
a narrower filter. For example, the 3 kHz roofing filter for SSB operation, or the 600 Hz filter for CW.
: The 600 Hz roofing filter is only available on VFO-A. The 300Hz filter for VFO-A on the FTDX5000, is optional on
other versions.
VFO-A Roofing Filter Setup
VFO-B Roofing Filter Setup
 Press the [A] button (the button will glow red), to activate the VFO-A receiver.
 Move the [R.FLT] knob up and down to set the desired bandwidth of the VFO-A Roofing Filter.
The selected bandwidth of the Roofing Filter will be
indicated in the R.FLT column of the Block Diagram
Display.
 Press the [B] button (the button will glow orange), to
activate the VFO-B receiver.
 Move the [R.FLT] knob up and down to set the desired bandwidth of the VFO-B Roofing Filter.
The selected bandwidth of the Roofing Filter will be
indicated in the R.FLT column of the Block Diagram
Display.
 Press the [R.FLT] knob in briefly, to quickly set the
Roofing Filter to the “AUTO” selection. The “AUTO”
mode selects the optimum Roofing Filter, determined
by a combination of the operating mode and the IF
bandwidth. The indicated bandwidth will blink for three
seconds in the Roofing Filter Display, and thereafter
will appear continuously. Typically, the filter will be
set to “AUTO”, but may be easily changed when
needed.
 Press the [R.FLT] knob in briefly, to quickly set the
Roofing Filter to the “AUTO” selection. The “AUTO”
mode selects the optimum Roofing Filter, determined
by a combination of the operating mode and the IF
bandwidth. The indicated bandwidth will blink for three
seconds in the Roofing Filter Display, and thereafter
will appear continuously. Typically, the filter will be
set to “AUTO”, but may be easily changed when
needed.
[R.FLT] Knob
[A] Button
[R.FLT] Knob [B] Button

ADVICE:
 The Roofing Filter selection will be memorized independently on each VFO memory in the VFO stack.
Page 56
TERMINOLOGY:
A “Roofing Filter,” as its name implies, places a “Roof”
over the receiver’s IF system bandwidth. This “Roof” protects the circuitry downstream from strong signal overload interference, just as a roof on a house protects the
contents from rain and snow.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS OFF FREQUENCY BY JUST A FEW KHZ)
NOTE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 57
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION
The Contour Filter system produces a gentle perturbation of the IF filter passband. The different frequency components of
the signal can be suppressed or enhanced, thus improving the sound and/or readability of the received signal.
VFO-A Contour Operation
VFO-B Contour Operation
 Press the (VFO-A)[CONT/APF] button. The button
will glow red and the position of the “null” (or “Peak”)
of the contour filter will be indicated in the SUB DISPLAY-II window. The (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob will
now function as the contour knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to achieve the
most pleasing audio reproduction of the incoming signal.
 Press the ( VFO-A )[ RESET ] button in briefly, to
quickly move the “null” (or “Peak”) position to center.
 To cancel Contour tuning, press the (VFO-A)[CONT/
APF] button once more.
 Press the (VFO-B)[CONT/APF] button. The button
will glow red and the current “null” (or “Peak”) position of the contour filter will be indicated in the SUB
DISPLAY-III window. The (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob
will now function as the contour knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to achieve the
most natural-sounding audio reproduction of the incoming signal.
 Press the ( VFO-B )[ RESET ] button in briefly, to
quickly move the “null” (or “Peak”) position to center.
 To cancel Contour tuning, press the (VFO-B)[CONT/
APF] button once more.
(VFO-A)[CONT/APF] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[CONT/APF] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob

ADVICE:
 The contour filter null or peaking level may be adjusted
using Menu item “113 RDSP CNTR LV”. The factory
–15
default null setting is “–15
–15” (dB).
 The bandwidth over which the contour null or peaking
affect is applied may be adjusted using Menu item “114
10
RDSP CNTR WI”. The factory default setting is “10
10”.
 You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB
DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item
“019 DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit
is connected, the Audio Scope (on the DMU-2000 “Oscilloscope” page) is particularly useful when adjusting
the Contour controls. You can see the affect of the
Contour system on the signal levels, and the position
of the null/peak with respect to frequency components
of interest. On the Audio Scope, you may visually observe the affect of the Contour Controls while listening to the signal, this will help build your intuition on
how best to use Contour tuning in the future.
Page 58
NOTE:
When receiving a single tone signal, such as CW, with the
Contour gain set to a high level (adjusted by Menu item
“113 RDSP CNTR LV”), the receive signal may occasionally be heard at a low volume, even if the AF GAIN
knob is set to minimum.
QUICK POINT:
When adjusted aggressively, the steep slopes of the DSP
filtering can impart an unnatural sound to an incoming signal. Often, a narrow bandwidth is not the key to improved
copy. The incoming signal itself may have undesirable or
excessive frequency components, especially in the low frequency range around 100-400 Hz. By judicious use of the
Contour filter, the “shoulder” of the passband response
may be altered, or components removed from within the
passband, allowing the desired signal to rise above the
background noise and interference in a manner not obtainable with other filtering systems.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
CONTOUR CONTROL OPERATION
Refer to Figure “B”, and notice the initial position of
the contour when the [CONT] button is pushed. Observe the “indentation” in the receiver passband where
the contour filter is placing a low-Q “notch” (according to the setting of Menu item “113 RDSP CNTR
LV”, as described on the previous page). Counterclockwise rotation of the [SELECT](contour) knob
causes the indentation to move toward a lower frequency (to the left) within the passband, while clockwise rotation causes the indentation to move toward a
higher frequency (to the right) within the passband. By
removing the interference or unwanted frequency components on the incoming signal, it is possible to make
the desired signal rise out of the background noise/
interference, and significantly enhance intelligibility.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
A
B
C
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
Page 59
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
IF SHIFT OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES)
The IF Shift allows you to vary the DSP filter passband higher or lower, (without changing the pitch of the incoming signal)
to reduce or eliminate interference. Because the carrier tuning frequency is not varied, there is no need to re-tune the
operating frequency when using the IF Shift to eliminating the interference. The total passband tuning range for the IF Shift
system is ±1 kHz.
VFO-A IF SHIFT Operation
VFO-B IF SHIFT Operation
 Press the ( VFO-A )[ SHIFT ] button. The ( VFOA)[SHIFT] button glows red, and the center position
of the IF passband will be indicated in the SUB
DISPLAY-II window. The (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob
will now function as the IF SHIFT knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to the left or right
to reduce the interference.
 Press the (VFO-A)[RESET] button briefly to quickly
move the filter passband to center.
 To turn the IF SHIFT operation “off”, press the (VFOA)[SHIFT] button again. The red LED of the (VFOA)[SHIFT] button turns off, and the filter passband
will move to the center. However, the last setting of
the IF SHIFT control will be retained until you change
it again.
 Press the ( VFO-B )[ SHIFT ] button. The ( VFOB)[SHIFT] button glows red, and the center position
of the IF passband will be indicated in the SUB
DISPLAY-III window. The ( VFO-B )[ SELECT ]
knob will now function as the IF SHIFT knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to the left or
right to reduce the interference.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RESET] button briefly to quickly
move the filter passband to center.
 To turn the IF SHIFT operation “off”, press the (VFOB)[SHIFT] button again. The red LED of the (VFOB)[SHIFT] button turns off, and the filter passband
will move to the center. However, the last setting of
the IF SHIFT control will be retained until you change
it again.
(VFO-A)[SHIFT] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[SHIFT] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
Refer to Figure “A” and notice the depiction of the IF
DSP filter as a thick line in the center of the passband,
no shift (the [SHIFT] button glows red). In Figure “B”,
an interfering signal has appeared inside the original
passband. In Figure “C”, you can see the effect of rotating the [SELECT](shift) knob and moving the filter so that the interference is outside of the passband.
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
A
B
Desired Signal
QRM
IF
BANDWIDTH
C
Desired Signal
Desired Signal
QRM
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
ADVICE:
You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item “019
DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
Page 60
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
WIDTH (IF DSP BANDWIDTH) TUNING (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT MODES)
The IF Width tuning system allows you to vary the width of the DSP IF filter passband, to eliminate interference. Moreover,
the bandwidth may actually be expanded from its default setting, should you wish to enhance incoming signal fidelity when
interference on the band is low.
VFO-A WIDTH Operation
VFO-B WIDTH Operation
 Press the ( VFO-A )[ WIDTH ] button. The ( VFOA)[WIDTH] button glows red, and the center position
of the IF passband will be indicated in the SUB
DISPLAY-II window. The (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob
will now function as the IF WIDTH knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to the left or right
to reduce the interference.
 Press the (VFO-A)[RESET] button briefly to set the
bandwidth to default.
 To turn the IF WIDTH operation “off”, press the (VFOA)[WIDTH] button again. The red LED of the (VFOA)[WIDTH] button turns off, and the bandwidth will be
set to default. However, the last setting of the IF WIDTH
control will be retained until you change it again.
 Press the ( VFO-B )[ WIDTH ] button. The ( VFOB)[WIDTH] button glows red, and the center position
of the IF passband will be indicated in the SUB
DISPLAY-III window. The ( VFO-B )[ SELECT ]
knob will now function as the IF WIDTH knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to the left or
right to reduce the interference.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RESET] button briefly to set the
bandwidth to default.
 To turn the IF WIDTH operation “off”, press the (VFOB)[WIDTH] button again. The red LED of the (VFOB)[WIDTH] button turns off, and the bandwidth will be
set to default. However, the last setting of the IF WIDTH
control will be retained until you change it again.
(VFO-A)[WIDTH] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[WIDTH] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Referring to Figure “B”, you can see the default bandwidth (the [WIDTH] button glows red).
A
B
C
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
By rotating the [SELECT](width) knob to the left, the
bandwidth will narrow (see Figure “A”). Rotation of
the [SELECT](width) knob to the right, as depicted
in Figure “C,” will widen the bandwidth.
The default bandwidth, and total bandwidth adjustment
range, will vary according to the operating mode and
the [NAR] button setting:
MODE
LSB/USB
CW
RTTY(LSB) / PKT(LSB/USB)
OFF
NAR SWITCH
ON
1.8 kHz - 4.0 kHz / 16 steps (2.4 kHz)
200 Hz - 1.8 kHz / 9 steps (1.8 kHz)
500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps (2.4 kHz)
50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps (500 Hz)
500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps (500 Hz)
50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps (300 Hz)
: Default (the [WIDTH] button glows red)
ADVICE:
You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item “019
DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE:
When rotating the [SELECT](WIDTH) knob counterclockwise, the transition between 50 Hz and 25 Hz bandwidth may be accompanied by a “ping” sound, depending
on the amount of noise present. This is a normal condition,
and you should turn down the volume, when wearing headphones, to minimize the amplitude of this momentary sound.
Page 61
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
USING IF SHIFT AND WIDTH TOGETHER (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES)
The IF Shift and Variable IF Width features, together, form a very effective interference-fighting filter system.
For example, in Figure “A” you can see how interference
has appeared both on the high and low sides of the desired
signal. By pressing the [WIDTH] button (the button will
glow red) and then rotating the [SELECT](width) knob,
as shown in Figure “B”, the interference from one side
can be eliminated, then press the [SHIFT] button to change
the function of the [SELECT] knob to the SHIFT knob
(the [SHIFT] button glows red. However, the IF Width
adjustment is not changed). Now, by re-positioning the
[SELECT](shift) knob (Figure “C”), the interference on
the opposite side can be removed, without re-introducing
the interference previously eliminated in Figure “B”.
A
B
Desired Signal
Desired Signal
QRM
QRM
Desired Signal
QRM
QRM
IF
BANDWIDTH
C
QRM
QRM
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
ADVICE:
The Width and Shift features are the primary tools you
should use for best interference reduction. After narrowing the bandwidth (width) and/or adjusting the center of
the passband (shift), the Contour control may also yield
further signal-enhancement benefits on the net residual
bandwidth. Additionally, the IF Notch Filter (see the next
section) may be utilized, in conjunction with the three other
filter systems, to significant advantage.
Page 62
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
IF NOTCH FILTER OPERATION (SSB/CW/RTTY/PKT/AM MODES)
The IF Notch filter is a highly effective system that allows you to slice out an interfering beat note or other carrier signal
from inside the receiver passband.
VFO-A IF Notch Operation
VFO-B IF Notch Operation
 Press the ( VFO-A )[ NOTCH ] button. The ( VFOA)[NOTCH] button glows red, and the current “null”
(or “Peak”) position of the IF notch filter will appear
in the SUB DISPLAY- II window. The ( VFOA)[SELECT] knob will now function as the notch
adjustment knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to adjust the center frequency of the IF notch filter.
 Press the (VFO-A)[RESET] button to move the “null”
position to center.
 To switch the IF notch filter off, press the (VFOA)[NOTCH] button once more.
 Press the ( VFO-B )[ NOTCH ] button. The (VFOB)[NOTCH] button glows red, and current “null” (or
“Peak”) position of the IF notch filter will be indicated
in the SUB DISPLAY- III window. The ( VFOB)[SELECT] knob will now function as the notch
adjustment knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to adjust the center frequency of the IF notch filter.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RESET] button to move the “null”
position to center.
 To switch the IF notch filter off, press the (VFOB)[NOTCH] button once more.
(VFO-A)[NOTCH] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[NOTCH] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
ADVICE:
 The width of the IF notch null may be adjusted using
Menu item “115 RDSP NOTCH WI”. Both “Wide”
and “Narrow” selections are available, with “Narrow”
providing the least disruption of the “desired” signal.
 You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB
DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item
“019 DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit
is connected, the effect of the IF notch filter may be
observed using the Audio Scope (on the “Oscilloscope”
page). The notch will be seen as a “dip” in the noise
platform observed. What’s more, the “Waterfall” display may be used to observe the effect of the IF notch
filter, which will appear as a white area in the colored
background. The tuning rate for the IF notch is somewhat slow while you adjust the [SELECT](notch)
knob, so the use of the Waterfall display to confirm
proper adjustment is highly recommended.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
The affect of rotation of the [SELECT](notch)
knob on the performance of the IF notch filter is
depicted in Figure “A”. In Figure “B”, you can see
the notching effect of the IF notch filter as you rotate the [SELECT](notch) knob to eliminate the
incoming interference.
A
B
Desired Signal
QRM
(Heterodyne)
Desired Signal
QRM
(Heterodyne)
IF
BANDWIDTH
IF
BANDWIDTH
Page 63
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION (DNR) OPERATION
The Digital Noise Reduction (DNR) system is designed to reduce the level of random noise found on the HF and 50 MHz
bands. It is especially effective during SSB operation. By rotating the [DNR] knob, any of 15 different noise-reduction
algorithms can be selected; each of these algorithms was created for dealing with a different noise profile, and you will want
to experiment with the DNR system to find the best setting according to the noise currently being experienced.
VFO-A DNR Operation
VFO-B DNR Operation
 Press the (VFO-A)[DNR] button. The button will glow
red, and the current noise-reduction algorithm will appear in the SUB DISPLAY-II window. The (VFOA)[SELECT] knob will now function as the notch
adjustment knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select the setting that most effectively reduces the noise level.
 Press the (VFO-A)[RESET] button to set the noisereduction algorithm to default.
 To switch the DNR system off, press the ( VFOA)[NOTCH] button once more.
 Press the (VFO-B)[DNR] button. The (VFO-B)[DNR]
button glows red, and the current noise-reduction algorithm will appear in the SUB DISPLAY-II window.
The (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob will now function as
the notch adjustment knob.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the setting that most effectively reduces the noise level.
 Press the (VFO-B)[RESET] button to set the noisereduction algorithm to default.
 To switch the DNR system off, press the ( VFOB)[NOTCH] button once more.
(VFO-A)[DNR] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-B)[DNR] Button
[RESET] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
ADVICE:
You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item “019
DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
DIGITAL NOTCH FILTER (DNF) OPERATION
The Digital Notch Filter (DNF) is an effective beat-canceling filter that can null out a number of interfering beat notes
inside the receiver passband. Because this is an Auto-Notch feature, there is no adjustment knob associated with this filter.
ADVICE:
If a very strong interfering carrier is encountered, we recommend you first use the IF notch filter, as it is the most effective
notching tool in the receiver section.
VFO-A DNF Operation
VFO-A DNF Operation
 Press the (VFO-A)[DNF] button. The button glows red,
confirming that the DNF system is engaged.
 To switch the DNF system off, press the ( VFOA)[DNF] button once more.
 Press the (VFO-B)[DNF] button. The button glows
red, confirming that the DNF system is engaged.
 To switch the DNF system off, press the ( VFOB)[DNF] button once more.
(VFO-A)[DNF] Button
Page 64
(VFO-B)[DNF] Button
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
NARROW (NAR) ONE-TOUCH IF FILTER SELECTION
VFO-A “One-Touch Narrow” Operation
VFO-B “One-Touch Narrow” Operation
 Press the [A] button to activate VFO-A (the button will
glow red).
 Pressing the [NAR] button engages a narrow IF DSP
filter.
 Pressing the [NAR] button once more returns the bandwidth control to the Width/Shift system. The factory
default of the bandwidth is as shown below.
ADVICE:
When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the “
” icon
will appear in the display, and the bandwidth depiction in
the SUB DISPLAY-II window will be narrowed (if SUB
DISPLAY-II window is showing the bandwidth).
 Press the [B] button (the button glows orange).
 Pressing the [NAR] button engages a narrow IF DSP
filter.
 Pressing the [NAR] button once more returns bandwidth control to the Width/Shift system. The factory
default settings of the bandwidth are as shown in the
table below.
ADVICE:
When the narrow bandwidth is selected, the “
” icon
will appear in the display, and the bandwidth on the SUB
DISPLAY-III will be reduced, (if the SUB DISPLAY-III
window indicates the bandwidth).
[A] Button
[B] Button
[NAR] Button
[NAR] Button
MODE
LSB/USB
CW
RTTY(LSB)
PKT(LSB/USB)
PKT(FM)
AM
FM
OFF
NAR BUTTON
2.4 kHz (1.5 kHz - 4.0 kHz / 17 steps)
2.4 kHz (500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
500 Hz (500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
500 Hz (500 Hz - 2.4 kHz / 7 steps)
25 kHz (±5.0 kHz Deviation)
9 kHz
25 kHz (±5.0 kHz Deviation)
ON
1.5 kHz (200 Hz - 1.5 kHz / 8 steps)
500 Hz (50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
300 Hz (50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
300 Hz (50 Hz - 500 Hz / 10 steps)
12.5 kHz (±2.5 kHz Deviation)
6 kHz
12.5 kHz (±2.5 kHz Deviation)
ADVICE:
You may select the display pattern shown in the SUB DISPLAY window from three patterns via Menu item “019
DISP SELECT”. See page 122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 65
INTERFERENCE REJECTION (SIGNALS WITHIN 3 KHZ)
IF NOISE BLANKER (NB) OPERATION
The FTDX5000 includes an effective IF Noise Blanker, which can significantly reduce pulse noise like that caused by
automotive ignition systems.
VFO-A NB Operation
VFO-B NB Operation
 Press the [A] button (the button glows red), if needed
to enable VFO-A.
 Press the [NB] button briefly to reduce short duration
pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The “
” icon will
appear in the display to confirm that the Narrow-NB is
operating.
 Press the [NB] button again to reduce longer-duration man-made pulse noise. The “
” icon will
blink for three seconds, and thereafter will appear continuously, to confirm that the Wide-NB is operating.
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[NB] knob to the point where the
offending noise is best reduced or eliminated.
 To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [NB] button once more. The “
” (or “
”) icon will
turn off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer
in operation.
 Press the [B] button (the [B] button glows orange).
 Press the [NB] button briefly to reduce short duration
pulse noise such as from switching transients, automobile ignitions and power lines. The “
” icon will
appear in the display to confirm that the Narrow-NB is
operating.
 Press the [NB] button again to reduce longer-duration man-made pulse noise. The “
” icon will
blink for three seconds, and thereafter will appear continuously, to confirm that the Wide-NB is operating.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[NB] knob to the point where the
offending noise is best reduced or eliminated.
 To end Noise Blanker operation, press the [NB] button once more. The “
” (or “
”) icon will turn
off, confirming that the Noise Blanker is no longer in
operation.
[A] Button
(VFO-A)[NB] Knob
Page 66
[NB] Button
[B] Button
[NB] Button
(VFO-B)[NB] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
The AGC system is designed to help compensate for fading and other propagation effects, with characteristics that can be
of particular value on each operating mode. The basic objective of AGC is to maintain a constant audio output level once
a certain minimum threshold of signal strength is achieved.
VFO-A AGC Selection
VFO-B AGC Selection
 Press the [A] button briefly to enable VFO-A (the LED
in the [A] button will glow red).
 Move the [AGC] knob up or down to set the desired
receiver recovery time constant of the VFO-A receiver.
The selected recovery time will be indicated in the AGC
column of the Block Diagram Display.
 Hold the [AGC] knob up or down for two seconds to
disable the AGC (for testing or weak-signal reception).
 For most operations, we recommend using the “AUTO”
mode by pressing the [AGC] knob in briefly, or moving the [AGC ] knob to set the ATT display to the
“AUTO” position.
 Press the [B] button (the [B] button glows orange).
 Move the [AGC] knob up and down to set the desired
receiver recovery time constant of the VFO-A receiver.
The selected recovery time will be indicated in the AGC
column of the Block Diagram Display.
 Hold the [AGC] knob up or down for two seconds to
disable the AGC (for testing or weak-signal reception).
 For most operations, we recommend using the “AUTO”
mode by pressing the [AGC] knob in briefly, or moving the [AGC ] knob to set the ATT display to the
“AUTO” position.
[AGC] Knob
[B] Button
[AGC] Knob
[A] Button

NOTE:
 When the AGC receiver recovery time is set to “OFF”,
the S-meter will no longer deflect. Additionally, you
will likely encounter distortion on stronger signals, as
the IF amplifiers and the following stages are probably being overloaded.
 Normally, the AGC “AUTO” selection is satisfactory
for most situations, but in the event of operation on a
crowded band where you wish to receive a weak signal, you may change the setting (to “FAST”, for example). The AGC “AUTO” mode selections are:
OPERATING MODE
LSB
USB
CW
AM
FM
RTTY
PKT (FM)
PKT (LSB)
AUTO AGC SELECTION
SLOW
SLOW
FAST
FAST
FAST
SLOW
FAST
SLOW
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ADVICE:
When a received signal becomes degraded due to pulse
type noise, you may improve signal readability by setting
Menu items “002 AGC FST HLD”, “004 AGC MID
HLD”, and “006 AGC SLW HLD” to “0 msec”.
QUICK POINT
Several aspects of AGC performance may be configured
via the Menu. However, because AGC can have such a
profound impact on overall receiver performance, we generally do not recommend any changes to the AGC Menu
selections until you are thoroughly familiar with the performance of the FTDX5000.
TERMINOLOGY:
Automatic Gain Control, or AGC, is a circuit that senses
the incoming signal strength, and then limits the gains of
the RF and IF stages, to maintain the output audio volume
at a more-or-less constant level. AGC also protects the
RF, IF, Audio, and DSP stages from overload, by limiting
the signal strength applied to circuits, regardless of the
input signal level.
Page 67
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
SLOPED AGC Operation
Audio Output
In traditional AGC systems, the audio output from the transceiver becomes essentially constant, once the threshold
SLOPED
for AGC action is reached (usually several dozen dB above the no-signal
noise floor). The FTDX5000, however, includes an innovative Sloped AGC
system on the VFO-A receiver that allows the audio volume to rise and fall
NORMAL
slightly according to signal strength. Although the rise/fall slope is not dramatic, it is sufficient to allow you to use your ear to discern and separate
signals according to signal strength, not just audio frequency.
Input Signal
Using Sloped AGC
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Use the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “107 ROUT AGC SLP”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to change the
setting to “SLOPE”.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. You will now be using the Sloped AGC
system.
Page 68
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TOOLS FOR COMFORTABLE AND EFFECTIVE RECEPTION
MUTE FEATURE (VFO-A BAND)
There may be occasions during Dual Receive operation
when you want to silence the VFO-A receiver temporarily,
to concentrate on the signal being received on the VFO-B
receiver. The Mute feature makes this simple to accomplish.
[POWER] Switch
[A] Button
Press the (VFO-A)[RX] button briefly, located to the upper left of the Main Tuning Dial knob. The VFO-A receiver will be silenced, and the green LED in the (VFOA)[RX] button will blink.
To restore reception on the VFO-A receiver, just press the
blinking (VFO-A)[RX] button once more.
ADVICE:
If you press the [POWER] switch briefly while the transceiver is turned on, the transceiver audio will be muted for
three seconds.
ADJUSTABLE RECEIVER AUDIO FILTER
The FTDX5000 includes a adjustable receiver audio filter, that provides precise, independent control of the low- and upperranges.
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to find Menu
items “047” through “050”; these parameters apply to
the adjustment of the receiver audio filter in the AM
mode, Menu items “053” through “056” apply to the
adjustment of the RX audio filter in the CW mode,
Menu items “075” through “078” apply to the adjustment of the RX audio filter in the FM mode, Menu
items “089” through “092” apply to the adjustment of
the RX audio filter in the RTTY mode, and Menu items
“099” through “102” apply to the adjustment of the
RX audio filter in the SSB mode.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to perform adjustments to a particular Menu item.
You may confirm the change of the sound quality from
the speaker or headphones.
4. When you have completed all adjustments, press and
hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save
the new settings and exit to normal operation. If you
only press the [MENU] button momentarily to exit,
any changes you performed will not be stored.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
AM
CW
FM
RTTY
SSB
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
047 A3E LCUT FRQ
048 A3E LCUT SLP
049 A3E HCUT FRQ
050 A3E HCUT SLP
053 A1A LCUT FRQ
054 A1A LCUT SLP
055 A1A HCUT FRQ
056 A1A HCUT SLP
075 F3E LCUT FRQ
076 F3E LCUT SLP
077 F3E HCUT FRQ
078 F3E HCUT SLP
089 RTTY LCUT FRQ
090 RTTY LCUT SLP
091 RTTY HCUT FRQ
092 RTTY HCUT SLP
099 A3J LCUT FRQ
100 A3J LCUT SLP
101 A3J HCUT FRQ
102 A3J HCUT SLP
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
OFF / 100 (Hz) ~ 1000 (Hz)
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
700 (Hz) ~ 4000 (Hz) / OFF
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
OFF / 100 (Hz) ~ 1000 (Hz)
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
700 (Hz) ~ 4000 (Hz) / OFF
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
OFF / 100 (Hz) ~ 1000 (Hz)
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
700 (Hz) ~ 4000 (Hz) / OFF
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
OFF / 100 (Hz) ~ 1000 (Hz)
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
700 (Hz) ~ 4000 (Hz) / OFF
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
OFF / 100 (Hz) ~ 1000 (Hz)
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
700 (Hz) ~ 4000 (Hz) / OFF
6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Page 69
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
[MOX] Button
[METER] Switch
[A] Button
[B] Button
[MODE] Buttons
[MIC] Knob
[RF PWR] Knob
1. The operating mode is selected using the [MODE ]
buttons. The VFO (A or B)
to which the selection is applied is selected by the [A]
or [B] button located to the
upper left of the Main
Tuning Dial knob. Usually, the [ A ] button
glows red, signifying
that VFO-A is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing the [B] button will
cause the [B] button to
glow orange, signifying VFO-B adjustment. Press the
[A] or [B] button to select the desired VFO. Then press
the [LSB] or [USB] button briefly to select one of the
SSB modes. For AM operation, press the [AM/FM]
button repeatedly until the “
” icon appears in the
display.
QUICK POINT:
By convention, LSB is used in the 7 MHz and lower
Amateur bands for SSB communication, and USB is
used on the 14 MHz and higher bands (the 10 MHz
band is used for CW and data modes only).
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to adjust the operating frequency. Alternatively, you may use the [UP]/
[DWN] scanning buttons on the MH-31B8 Hand Microphone to sweep up or down the current band.
3. Press the microphone’s PTT (Push To Talk) switch to
begin transmission; speak into the microphone in a
normal voice level.
ADVICE:
 The “
” indicator will light up in the frequency
display area, confirming that transmission is in
progress.
 When transmitting in the AM mode, rotate the [RF
PWR] knob to set a maximum (carrier) power output of 50 Watts.
Page 70
4. In the SSB mode, adjust the microphone amplifier gain to match the
microphone and your voice level.
set the [METER ] switch to the
“ALC” position and close the PTT
switch. Speak into the microphone in
a normal voice level, and adjust the
[MIC] (gain) knob so that the ALC
voltage stays within the blue ALC
zone of the meter (up to 2/3 of full
scale deflection) on voice
peaks.
ADVICE:
 The microphone gain of
the AM mode has been programmed at the factory
to a level that should be satisfactory for most situations. However, using Menu item “051 A3E MIC
GAIN”, you may set a different fixed value, or
choose the “MCVR” option, which then lets you
use the front panel [MIC] knob to set the microphone gain in the AM mode. In this case, the [MIC]
knob should not be advanced to the point where
the ALC meter deflects. In many cases, the same
setting used on SSB will be satisfactory.
 The relative Microphone Gain level will show for
3 seconds in the lower right corner of the Main
Display whenever the inner [MIC] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
5. Release the PTT switch at the end of your transmission. The transceiver will return to the receive mode.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
SSB/AM MODE TRANSMISSION
ADVICE:
 ALC meter deflection may be caused by excessive drive
power, and also by reflected power detected in the antenna system. If the impedance presented to the transceiver is other than 50 Ohms, the ALC meter action
observed may not be related to the proper setting of
the [MIC] (gain) knob. Therefore, we recommend that
you make [MIC] gain adjustments into a dummy load
or an antenna system presenting an impedance very
close to 50 Ohms.
 Rotate the [RF PWR] knob to set the desired power
output. Clockwise rotation of the [RF PWR] knob will
increase the power. The adjustment
range is between 10 Watts and 200
Watts, and you should always use the
minimum power necessary for maintaining reliable communications.
The RF Power Output will show for 3 seconds in the
lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the
outer [RF PWR] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you
may disable the 3-second display feature via Menu item
“017 DISP LVL IND” See page 122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
 The analog PO meter indicates the average power output level. SSB transmit average talk power is normally
10% to 50% of the peak power output. Voice characteristics, microphone qualities, parametric equalizer
and compression settings affect actual talk power output.
 When performing transmitter tests for setup of the
[MIC] or [RF PWR] knobs, be sure to monitor the
frequency before transmitting, to avoid interference to
others who may already be using the frequency.
 Four techniques for initiating Transmit/Receive control are provided on the FTDX5000. You may choose
the technique(s) that best suit your operating needs:
 Pressing the microphone PTT switch will engage
the transmitter.
 The rear panel PTT jack may be connected to a
foot switch or other manual switching device in
order to engage the transmitter.
 Pressing the front panel [MOX] button will lock
the transmitter on. Press the [MOX] button again
to return to receive.
 The VOX (Voice Operated Xmit) circuit will engage the transmitter automatically when you speak
into the microphone. For VOX operation details,
see page 81.
Page 71
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
The Automatic Antenna Tuner (“ATU”) built into each FTDX5000 is crafted to ensure a 50-Ohm load for the final amplifier
stage of the transmitter. We recommend the ATU be used whenever you operate the FTDX5000.
ADVICE:
 The ATU of the FTDX5000, being located inside the station, only adjusts the impedance presented to the transmitter at
the station end of your coaxial cable feedline. It does not “tune” the SWR at the antenna feedpoint itself. When designing and building your antenna system, we recommend that every effort be made to ensure a low SWR at the antenna
feedpoint.
 The ATU of the FTDX5000 includes 100 memories for tuning data. Eleven of these memories are allocated, one per
Amateur band, so that each band has at least one setting preset for use on that band. The remaining 89 memories are
reserved for the 89 most-recent tuning points, allowing quick frequency change without the need to retune the ATU.
 The ATU in the FTDX5000 is designed to match impedances within the range of 16.5 Ohms to 150 Ohms, corresponding to an SWR of 3:1 or less on the HF amateur bands (6 meter amateur band: 25 Ohms to 100 Ohms, corresponding to
an SWR of 2:1 or less). Accordingly, simple non-resonant whip antennas, along with random-length wires and the
“G5RV” antenna (on most bands) may not be within the impedance matching range of the ATU.
ATU OPERATION
1. Rotate the [RF PWR] knob fully clockwise (to the
right).
2. Use the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the radio to the
desired operating frequency within the Amateur band.
3. Press the [TUNE] button briefly to place the ATU in
the transmit line (no adjustment/tuning will occur yet).
” icon will appear in the display.
The “
QUICK POINT:
The brief press of the [TUNE] button will turn the tuner
on, and the microprocessor will automatically select
the tuning point closest to the current operating frequency.
4. Press and hold in the [TUNE] button for two seconds
to begin automatic tuning. The transmitter will be engaged, and the “
” icon will blink while tuning is
in progress. When the optimum tuning point has been
reached, the radio will return to receive, and the
“
” icon will again glow steadily (instead of
blinking).
5. To disconnect the ATU from the transmit line, press
the [TUNE] button briefly. The “
” icon will turn
off, confirming that the ATU has been turned off. In
the “Off” mode, the transceiver will be directly connected to the coaxial cable connected to your antenna,
and it will operate based on whatever impedance is
present at the station end of the coax.
Page 72
[TUNE] Button
[RF PWR] Knob
ADVICE:
The ATU circuit is located between the final amplifier and
the rear-panel antenna jack; reception is not affected by
the ATU.
QUICK POINT:
As shipped from the factory, only one ATU alignment point
is saved on each Amateur band. This was memorized during the final alignment and performance verification stages
on the production line.
NOTE:
Please check the operating frequency before beginning the
tuning process, to be sure you are not interfering with others who may already be using the frequency.
TERMINOLOGY:
Antenna Tuner Memories: The microprocessor of the ATU
makes a note of the positions of the tuning capacitors and
the selected inductors, and stores the data for each 10 kHz
window in which tuning has occurred. This eliminates the
need to re-tune every time you return to a frequency on
which you already have completed the tuning process.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
USING THE AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
ABOUT ATU OPERATION
Figure 1 depicts a situation where normal tuning of the ATU has been successfully completed, and the tuning data has been
stored in the ATU memory. The antenna system as seen by the transmitter is shown.
In Figure 2, the operator has changed frequency, and the “
” icon is shown. The operator presses and holds in the
[TUNE] button for two seconds to begin impedance matching using the ATU.
If a high SWR condition exists (above 3:1), corrective action must be taken in the antenna system to bring the impedance
closer to 50 Ohms. The ATU will refuse to memorize settings on frequencies where the SWR exceeds 3:1. The high SWR
may indicate a mechanical failure in the antenna or feed system, and such failures can lead to the generation of spurious
signals causing TVI, etc.
SWR: 2.0
Feed Point SWR
SWR: 1.5
SWR: 1.0
Frequency
SWR after ATU Tuning
FIGURE 1
The “
” icon appears on the display
when you transmit on this frequency
Memorized ATU Tuning
SWR: 3.0
SWR: 3.0
SWR: 2.0
Retuned Setting
SWR: 1.0
Frequency
FIGURE 2
About ATU Memories
SWR (Post-tuning) Less than 1.5:1
The tuning settings are committed to the ATU memory.
SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 1.5:1
Tuning data will not be retained in memory. If you return to the same frequency, the tuning process must be repeated.
SWR (Post-tuning) Greater than 3:1
The “
” icon will light up, and tuning settings, if achieved, will not be memorized. Please investigate and
resolve the high SWR condition before attempting further operation using this antenna.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 73
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
The FTDX5000 includes a unique Three-Band Parametric Microphone Equalizer, that provides precise, independent control over the low-, mid-, and treble-ranges in your voice waveform. You may utilize one group of settings when the speech
processor is off, and an another independent group of settings when the speech processor is on.
Setup of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
1. Connect the microphone to the MIC jack.
2. Set the [RF PWR] knob to its minimum value, to reduce interference to other users during adjustment.
ADVICE:
 We recommend you consider connecting a dummy
load to one of the Antenna jacks, and monitor your
signal on a separate receiver, to prevent interference to other users.
 You will have the best chance of hearing the effects of adjustments if you wear headphones (connected to the monitor receiver) while monitoring
your transmitted signal.
3. To adjust the Parametric Microphone Equalizer while
the speech processor is disabled, press the [PROC]
button until the “
” icon appears (or blinks) in
the display. To adjust the Parametric Microphone
Equalizer with the speech processor engaged, press the
[PROC] button until the “
” and “
” icon
appears in the display.
ADVICE:
A blinking “
” icon indicates the Parametric
Microphone Equalizer menu settings have all been set
to “OFF”, as described later.
4. Press the [MONI] button, if you want to listen on the
FTDX5000’s internal monitor. Adjust the monitor level
using the [MONI] knob.
5. Press the [MENU] button briefly. The Menu list will
appear in the display.
6. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to find the
“TAUD” Menu area, which contains Menu items “152”
through “160”; these parameters apply to the adjustment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer when
the speech processor is disabled. Menu items “161”
through “169” apply to the adjustment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer when the speech processor
is engaged.
7. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to perform adjustments to a particular Menu item.
[MONI] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MONI] Knob
[PROC] Button
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
8. Press the PTT switch, and speak into the microphone
while listening to the effects of the changes you are
making (in step 6). Because the overall effect on the
sound will change with each adjustment you make, you
should make several passes through each adjustment
area, to be sure that you are achieving the optimum
setting.
9. When you have completed all adjustments, press and
hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save
the new settings and exit to normal operation. If you
only press the [MENU] button momentarily to exit,
any changes you performed will not be stored.
ADVICE:
To roll off excessive bass response in a wide-range studio
microphone, try putting a 10 dB null at 100 Hz with a
bandwidth of “1” or “2,” do about a 3 dB null centered on
800 Hz with a bandwidth of “3,” and then put an 8 dB
peak centered on 2100 Hz with a bandwidth of “1.” These
are starting recommendations; each microphone and user’s
voice will be different, often requiring different settings.
QUICK POINT:
The Parametric Equalizer is a unique system for adjusting the signal quality. Because the high, mid, and low audio ranges
may be adjusted so precisely, it is possible to craft a response that provides a more natural and pleasant sound than you have
ever experienced before. Or, the effective “talk power” can be significantly enhanced.
The aspects of configuration that you may adjust with the Parametric Equalizer are:
Center Frequency: The center frequency of each of the three bands may be adjusted.
Gain: The amount of enhancement (or suppression) within each band may be adjusted.
Q: The bandwidth over which the equalization is applied may be adjusted.
Page 74
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
PARAMETRIC MICROPHONE EQUALIZER (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
Activating the Parametric Microphone Equalizer
1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described
on page 70.
2. Press the [PROC] button briefly. The “
” icon
will appear in the display, confirming that the Parametric Microphone Equalizer is engaged.
ADVICE:
A blinking “
” icon indicates the Parametric
Microphone Equalizer menu settings have all been set
to “OFF” (“152 TAUD EQ1 FRQ”, “155 TAUD EQ2
FRQ”, and “158 TAUD EQ3 FRQ”).
3. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak
into the microphone in a normal voice level.
4. To switch the Parametric Microphone Equalizer off,
press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “
”
icon disappears.
[PROC] Button
[MIC] Knob
3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “OFF”)
(Low) “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
Center Frequency “152 TAUD EQ1 FRQ”
(Mid) “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
“155 TAUD EQ2 FRQ”
(High) “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
“158 TAUD EQ3 FRQ”
(Low) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
Parametric Gain
“153 TAUD EQ1 LVL”
(Mid) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
“156 TAUD EQ2 LVL”
(High) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
“159 TAUD EQ3 LVL”
(Low) “1” ~ “10”
Q (Bandwidth)
“154 TAUD EQ1 BW”
(Mid) “1” ~ “10”
“157 TAUD EQ2 BW”
(High) “1” ~ “10”
“160 TAUD EQ3 BW”
3-STAGE PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER ADJUSTMENTS (SPEECH PROCESSOR: “ON”)
(Low) “100” (Hz) ~ “700” (Hz)
Center Frequency “161 TAUD PE1 FRQ”
(Mid) “700” (Hz) ~ “1500” (Hz)
“164 TAUD PE2 FRQ”
(High) “1500” (Hz) ~ “3200” (Hz)
“167 TAUD PE3 FRQ”
(Low) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
Parametric Gain
“162 TAUD PE1 LVL”
(Mid) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
“165 TAUD PE2 LVL”
(High) “–20” (dB) ~ “+10” (dB)
“168 TAUD PE3 LVL”
(Low) “1” ~ “10”
Q (Bandwidth)
“163 TAUD PE1 BW”
(Mid) “1” ~ “10”
“166 TAUD PE2 BW”
(High) “1” ~ “10”
“169 TAUD PE3 BW”
+10dB
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
f1
f2
f3
Parametric Gain
0 dB
-10dB
-20dB
100~700Hz
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
700~1500Hz 1500~3200Hz
Page 75
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
USING THE SPEECH PROCESSOR (SSB MODE)
The Speech Processor is designed to increase “talk power” by increasing the average power output via a sophisticated
compression technique. The result is improved intelligibility when conditions are difficult.
1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described
on page 70.
2. Press the [PROC] button repeatedly until the “
”
and “
” icons appear in the display, confirming
that the Speech Processor is engaged.
ADVICE:
A blinking “
” icon indicates the Parametric
Microphone Equalizer menu settings have all been set
to “OFF” (“161 TAUD PE1 FRQ”, “164 TAUD PE2
FRQ”, and “167 TAUD PE3 FRQ”).
3. Set the [PROC ] knob between the 9:00 to 12:00
o’clock position.
ADVICE:
The relative compression level of the Speech Processor will show for 3 seconds in the lower right corner of
the Main Display whenever the outer [PROC] knob is
turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you
may disable the 3-second display feature via Menu item
“017 DISP LVL IND” See page 122 for details.
4. Rotate the [METER] switch fully to the left, to select
“COMP” (Compression).
5. Press the PTT switch on the microphone, and speak
into the microphone in a normal voice level. Confirm
that the compression level is within the 5 dB to 10 dB
range.
ADVICE:
We recommend that you set the [PROC] knob between
9:00 to 12:00 o’clock position as described previously.
6. To switch the Speech Processor off, press the [PROC]
button repeatedly until the “
” and “
”
icons disappear.
Page 76
[MONI] Button
[PROC] Button
[METER] Switch [MONI] Knob
[PROC] Knob
[MIC] Button
ADVICE:
 Excessive advancement of the [PROC] knob will result in a degradation of the transmitted signal-to-noise
ratio, thereby reducing intelligibility at the other end
of the circuit.
 The Transmit Monitor provides a helpful way of verifying proper adjustment of the compression level.
Pressing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI]
knob for a comfortable listening level while you are
transmitting, allows you to hear the difference in sound
quality as you make adjustments.
 The [RF PWR] knob still controls the RF power output, whether or not the Speech Processor is engaged.
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit
is connected, you may observe the effect of your compression level adjustments by viewing the wave-form
on the “Oscilloscope” page.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
ADJUSTING THE SSB TRANSMITTED BANDWIDTH (SSB MODE)
For SSB transmission, a default bandwidth of 2.4 kHz is provided. This bandwidth provides reasonable fidelity along with
good talk power, and is typical of the bandwidth used for decades during SSB transmission. However, the bandwidth may
be varied by the operator, when preferred, to provide different levels of fidelity or increased talk power.
Here’s how to adjust the transmitted bandwidth on SSB:
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to engage the Menu.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob, and select Menu
item “104 A3J TX BPF”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the desired bandwidth. The available selections are 50-3000,
100-2900, 200-2800, 300-2700, 400-2600, and
3000WB. The default is 300-2700 Hz. A wider bandwidth will provide greater fidelity, while a narrow bandwidth will compress the available transmitter power
into less spectrum, resulting in more “talk power” for
DX pile-ups.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
ADVICE:
 The Transmit Monitor is very helpful way of verifying
the effects on fidelity of changing the bandwidth. Pressing the [MONI] button then adjusting the [MONI] knob
for a comfortable listening level while you are transmitting, you will be able to hear the difference in sound
quality as you make changes.
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit
is connected, you may verify the effect of your adjustments of the transmitted bandwidth by observing the
Audio Scope on the “Oscilloscope” page.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[MONI] Button
[MONI] Knob
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
QUICK POINTS:
 The higher fidelity associated with wide bandwidth will
be particularly enjoyable on the low bands, during local rag-chew QSOs.
 The “3000WB” setting is a special hi-fidelity setting,
whereby the transmitted bandwidth is in excess of 3
kHz. This selection, in conjunction with judicious adjustment of the Parametric Microphone Equalizer (see
next chapter) can provide truly outstanding fidelity and
very natural-sounding audio.
 When using the wider bandwidth selections (especially
“3000WB”), the apparent power output from the transmitter may seem lower. This is because the available
power from the transmitter is being distributed over a
wider bandwidth, and the power detection circuitry
does not compensate for the effect of the bandwidth
selection (it is calibrated in the default 2.4 kHz bandwidth).
Page 77
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE)
Class-A operation of the FTDX5000 transmitter is provided, yielding ultra-low distortion products during SSB operation.
Power output during Class-A operation is 75 Watts.
1. To engage Class-A operation, press the [CLASS-A]
button. The “
” icon will appear in the display,
confirming that Class-A operation has been selected.
2. Engaging the “Class-A” mode actually places the transceiver in a condition whereby the Bias level may be
adjusted, via the Menu mode.
1) Press the [MENU] button briefly, to engage the
Menu.
2) Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob, and select
Menu item “170 TGEN BIAS”.
3) Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the
desired BIAS level “1 - 100” to set the transceiver
for operation anywhere between Class-A and ClassAB (Class-AB has lower heat dissipation but higher
distortion products).
A menu setting of “100” will place the transmitter
fully in Class-A operation. Counter-clockwise rotation of the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob will move
the transmitter toward Class-AB operation. The
menu setting “1” will place the transmitter fully in
Class-AB operation.
)
4 Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to save the new setting and exit to normal
operation.
3. To exit from the CLASS-A mode, press the [CLASSA] switch once more. The “
” icon disappears,
confirming that the CLASS-A mode has been disengaged.
[CLASS-A] Button
[MENU] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Id: Drain Current
VDS: Drain Voltage
CLASS-AB
Page 78
CLASS-A
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ENHANCING TRANSMIT SIGNAL QUALITY
LOW- DISTORTION CLASS-A OPERATION (SSB MODE)
ADVICE
 During Class-A operation, 10-Amps of Bias current will be flowing, regardless of the modulation level that leads to
actual power output. Therefore, if the ambient temperature in your operation location is high, the transceiver temperature may rise as well, due to the high bias level (which must be dissipated as heat). Depending on the temperature, you
may wish to reduce the BIAS level using menu item “170 TGEN BIAS”, to reduce the amount of heat being generated.
 When the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit and a video monitor are connected, you can monitor the heat
sink temperature on the video monitor; thus, you can always be aware of a rise in temperature during Class-A operation.
Normally, the temperature is below 80 °C. If the temperature rises to near or above this value, however, we recommend
you adjust the BIAS level toward Class-AB via menu item “170 TGEN BIAS” (decrease the numerical value to reduce
the heat being dissipated).
 An innovative aspect of the “Class-A” mode is that the actual power output is always limited to 75 Watts. So even
though you might adjust the BIAS in the direction of Class-AB operation, the power output will not rise; this eliminates
the need to re-tune your linear amplifier, if used.
QUICK POINT
 Class-A operation provides a significant improvement in transmitter distortion suppression. During Class-A operation,
the 3rd-order IMD products are typically suppressed 45 dB. The 5th- and higher-order IMD products that can cause
“splatter” and interfere with others, will typically be suppressed 70 dB or more.
 If you are using a linear amplifier such as the VL-1000, the low distortion produced by the FTDX5000’s transmitter
means these intermodulation distortion products will not exist to be amplified by your linear.
Class-A 75W PEP IMD
Class-AB 200W PEP IMD
 The High-Power 200-Watt Final Amplifier Stage of the FTDX5000 utilizes a pair of ST Micro Electronics Corp. SD2931
MOSFET devices operating at 50 Volts. The push-pull configuration provides low distortion along with high power
output. The 92 mm thermostatically-controlled cooling fan directs forced air across the heat sink, when triggered by a
rise in heat sink temperature.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 79
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
VOICE MEMORY (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
You may utilize the Voice Memory capability of the FTDX5000 by plugging in the supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad
into the rear panel REMOTE jack.
The Voice Memory system includes five memories capable of storing up to 20 seconds of voice audio each. The maximum
that any memory can hold is 20 seconds.
Recording Your Own Voice in Memory
Checking Your Recording
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
panel [MODE] buttons.
2. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2 briefly. A blinking
“
” icon will appear in the display
1. Be sure that the front panel [MOX] and [VOX] buttons are both “Off” (the LED imbedded in the button
must be off).
2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key (whichever one you just
recorded in), and you will hear the contents of the voice
memory you just recorded.
LOCK
ON
OFF
LOCK
ON
3. Press any of the FH-2’s keys numbered [1] through
[5] to select that memory storage register. If you do
not press the PTT key (see next step) within five seconds, the memory storage process will be cancelled.
LOCK
ON
OFF
ADVICE:
You may adjust the playback level of the recording via
Menu item “020 DVS RX LVL”.
Transmitting the Recorded Message
OFF
1. Select the LSB, USB, AM, or FM mode using the front
panel [MODE] buttons.
2. Press the front panel [BK-IN] button briefly.
3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key, depending on which
memory register message you wish to transmit. If you
hit the key again during playback, the message will be
terminated.
4. Press the microphone’s PTT switch briefly, the
” icon will glow steadily, and recording will
“
begin.
5. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level to
record the message (such as “CQ DX, CQ DX, this is
W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie, W 6 Delta X-Ray Charlie,
Over”). Remember that the time limit for recording
any message is 20 seconds.
6. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key to terminate the message
storage process.
Page 80
LOCK
ON
OFF
ADVICE:
You may adjust the transmit (audio) level of the recording
via Menu item “021 DVS TX LVL”.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
VOX (AUTOMATIC TX/RX SWITCHING USING VOICE CONTROL: SSB/AM/FM MODES)
Instead of using the microphone’s PTT switch or the front panel [MOX] switch to activate the transmitter, the VOX (Voice
Operated TX/RX Control) system provides hands-free, automatic activation of the transmitter, based on voice input into
the microphone. Setup of the VOX system takes only a few seconds.
1. Adjust the [MIC] (gain) knob for SSB use, as described
on page 70.
2. Set the [VOX] and [DELAY] knobs fully counter-clockwise (to the left).
3. Press the [VOX] button briefly, to engage VOX operation. The [VOX] button will glow red.
4. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level,
and rotate the [VOX] knob clockwise (to the right) until
the point where your voice input activates the transmitter.
ADVICE:
Do not advance the setting of the [VOX] knob too far,
as this will make the transmitter respond to minor background noises in your station.
5. Now stop speaking, and note the amount of time it takes
for the receiver to recover. If the hang time is too long
or too short; rotate the [DELAY] knob, while speaking
briefly into the microphone, and then pausing, to set
the desired hang time. Clockwise rotation of the [DELAY] knob will increase the hang time.
ADVICE:
The hang time of the VOX circuit will show for 3 seconds in the lower right corner of the Main Display
whenever the outer [DELAY] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you
may disable the 3-second display feature via Menu item
“017 DISP LVL IND” See page 122 for details.
[VOX] Button
[MIC] Knob
[VOX] Knob
[DELAY] Knob
6. To exit from VOX operation, press the [VOX] button
once more. We recommend doing this if you are going
to leave your station, to prevent inadvertent activation
of the VOX system by a ringing nearby telephone,
speaker audio from a TV, etc.
ADVICE:
 The Anti-Trip setting sets the negative feedback of receiver audio to the microphone, to prevent receiver
audio from activating the transmitter (via the microphone) can be adjusts via Menu item “176 TGEN
ANTI VOX”.
 VOX operation may be engaged on voice modes (SSB/
AM/FM) and on AFSK-based data modes. Use Menu
item “175 TGEN VOX SEL” (the selections are
“MIC” and “DATA”).
MONITOR (SSB/AM/FM MODES)
You may listen to the quality of your transmitted signal using the Monitor feature.
1. Press the [MONI] button. The “
” icon will appear in the display, indicating that the Monitor is turned
on.
2. During transmission, rotate the [MONI] knob to adjust the audio level from the Monitor. Clockwise rotation of this knob will increase the volume level.
3. To switch the Monitor off again, press the [MONI]
” icon will turn
button briefly once more. The “
off, confirming that the Monitor is now disengaged.
[MONI] Button
[MONI] Knob
ADVICE:
 If you are using the speaker for monitoring, instead of headphones, excessive advancement of the [MONI] knob can
cause feedback to occur. Additionally, this feedback can cause the VOX system to hang up in a loop, making it impossible to return to receive. Therefore, we recommend the use of headphones, if at all possible, or the minimum usable
setting of the [MONI] knob, if the speaker must be used.
 Because the monitor feature utilizes a sampling of the transmitter’s IF signal, it can be very useful for checking the
adjustment of the Speech Processor or Parametric Equalizer on SSB, and for checking the general signal quality on AM
and FM.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 81
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SPLIT OPERATION USING THE TX CLARIFIER (VFO-A OPERATION)
For split TX/RX operation in “casual” pile-ups, where the split is less than 10 kHz, the TX Clarifier (Offset Tuning) feature
may be utilized.
1. Press the [TX CLAR/LOCK ] button briefly. The
“
” and “
” icon will appear in the display,
and the programmed offset will be
applied to the receive frequency.
ADVICE:
” and “
” icon does not appear, check
If the “
to see if the LED imbedded in the [A/B] button glows
orange. If so, pressing the [A/B] button briefly, will
cause the [A/B] button to go out. Now, press the [TX
CLAR/LOCK] button briefly, to begin clarifier operation.
2. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to set the desired
transmitter offset. A maximum
split of ±9.999 kHz may be set.
3. To exit from TX Clarifier operation, press the [TX
CLAR/LOCK] button once more. The “
” icon will
disappear from the display.
QUICK POINT:
When attempting to work a DX station on CW, in a splitfrequency pile-up, remember that a large number of other
stations may also be using Yaesu transceivers with capabilities similar to your FTDX5000. On the DX side of the
pile-up, everyone calling precisely on the same CW frequency will sound like a single tone! So you may have
more success if you use the RX Clarifier to find a hole in
the pile-up, instead of trying to zero-beat the last station
worked by the DX station.
[TX CLAR/LOCK] Button
[A/B] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
[CLEAR] Button
ADVICE:
 The frequency step of the TX clarifier depends on the
Main Tuning Dial knob.
 To listen to the pile-up calling the DX station, to find
the station currently being worked, you may press the
[RX CLAR/FAST] button. Once you have zeroed in
on the station calling the DX (use the SPOT function
on CW for precise alignment of your frequency), you
may then briefly press the [RX CLAR/FAST] button
again to cancel the RX Clarifier, and return to reception on the DX station’s frequency.
 Just as with receiver clarifier operation, the amount of
offset from the original VFO frequency will appear in
the small display window.
 As with receiver clarifier operation, when you turn the
TX clarifier off the last-used offset is not lost, and will
be available if you turn the TX Clarifier back on. To
clear the Clarifier offset, briefly press the [CLEAR]
button.
Clarifier Offset Bar Indicator
A visual depiction of the relative offset of the Clarifier may be displayed, using the Bar Indicator.
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select
Menu item “012 DISP BAR SEL”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B )[ SELECT ] knob to select
CLAR (Clarifier)” (re“CLAR
CW
placing the default “CW
[Plus (+) Offset]
TUNE (CW TUNING)”
selection).
[Zero Offset]
4. Press and hold in the
[MENU] button for two
seconds to save the new
(Minus (–) Offset)
setting and exit to normal operation.
Page 82
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
A powerful capability of the FTDX5000 is its flexibility in Split Frequency operation, using the Main (VFO-A) and Sub
(VFO-B) frequency registers. This makes the FTDX5000 especially useful for high-level DX-pedition use, as the Split
operation capability is very advanced and easy to use.
1. Set the VFO-A frequency as desired.
2. Set the VFO-B frequency.
3. Now press the [SPLIT] button briefly. The front panel
switch/LEDs will look like this:
(VFO-A)[RX] button: LED glows green
(VFO-A)[TX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[RX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[TX] button: LED glows red
4. During Split operation, the VFO-A register will be used
for reception, while the VFO-B register will be used
for transmission. If you press the [SPLIT] button once
more, Split operation will be cancelled.
(VFO-A)[RX] button: LED glows green
(VFO-A)[TX] button: LED glows red
(VFO-B)[RX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[TX] button: LED off
5. You may also press the (VFO-A)[TX] button to return
transmit frequency control to the VFO-A side, thereby
canceling split operation.
ADVICE:
 During normal (non-split) VFO-A operation, you may
simply press the (VFO-B)[TX] button (located above
and to the right of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob) to engage Split operation. The (VFO-B)[TX] button will
glow red when you press the button.
B] button will
 During Split operation, pressing the [A
reverse the contents of VFO-A and VFO-B. Press the
[A
B] button once more, to return to the original frequency alignment.
 During Split operation, if you press the (VFO-B)[RX]
button above and to the right of the [CLAR(VFO-B)]
knob, you will engage Dual Receive operation. Now
you can listen to both sides of the DX pile-up, and
transmit on the VFO-B frequency. This is very useful
to determine the timing of your calls, while also monitoring both sides of the pile-up.
 During Split operation, you may also listen to the TX
frequency temporarily, by pressing the [TXW] button
(just below the [SPLIT] button).
 It is possible to set different operating modes (for example, LSB and USB) on the two VFOs used during
Split operation.
 During Split operation, it is also possible to set VFOA and VFO-B to different amateur bands. But, remember that Dual Reception must be within the same band.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-A)[RX] Button
(VFO-A)[TX] Button
(VFO-B)[TX] Button
(VFO-B)[RX] Button
[SPLIT] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
[TXW] Button
QUICK POINT:
The [SPLIT] button function differs between a brief press
and a long press of the button.
 Press the [SPLIT] button briefly to toggle the transmission control between VFO-A and VFO-B (Split
Frequency Operation).
 Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two seconds
to copy the VFO-A frequency to VFO-B, this increases
the VFO-B frequency + 5 kHz, and the transmission
control switches to VFO-B (Quick Split Operation: See
page 85).
Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two seconds
again to increment the VFO-B frequency another + 5
kHz and keep the transmission control to VFO-B.
Page 83
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
VFO Tracking Feature
In the default setting, the VFO-A frequency and VFO-B
frequency are changed individually using the Main Tuning Dial knob and the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
(VFO-B)[RX] Button
If you want to tune the VFO-A frequency and VFO-B frequency together, the VFO Tracking feature is very useful.
Here is the procedure for activating the VFO Tracking feature:
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
1. Press and hold in the (VFO-B)[RX] button for two
seconds. This provides a “Short-cut” to Menu item “038
GENE TRACK”.
2. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the desired Tracking mode.
OFF
OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature.
BAND
BAND: When you change the band on the VFO-A side,
the VFO-B band will automatically change to
be the same band as VFO-A.
FREQ
BAND
FREQ: This function is similar to the “BAND
BAND” setting,
and will additionally “lock” VFO-A and VFOB together. Turning the Main Dial will tune both
VFO-A and VFO-B simultaneously.
3. Press and hold in the (VFO-B)[RX] button for two
seconds to lock in the new configuration and exit to
normal operation.
Page 84
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TRANSMITTER CONVENIENCE FEATURES
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
Quick Split Operation
The Quick Split feature allows you to set a one-touch offset of +5 kHz, to be applied to the transmit frequency on
VFO-B, as compared to the VFO-A frequency.
1. Start with regular transceiver operation on the VFOA.
(VFO-A)[RX] button: LED glows green
(VFO-A)[TX] button: LED glows red
(VFO-B)[RX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[TX] button: LED off
2. Press and hold in the [SPLIT] button for two seconds to engage the Quick Split feature, and apply a
frequency 5 kHz above the VFO-A frequency to
the VFO-B frequency register.
The VFO configuration will then be:
(VFO-A)[RX] button: LED glows green
(VFO-A)[TX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[RX] button: LED off
(VFO-B)[TX] button: LED glows red
3. Press and hold in the [SPLIT] switch for two seconds to increment the VFO-B frequency another
+5 kHz.
(VFO-A)[RX] Button
(VFO-A)[TX] Button
(VFO-B)[TX] Button
(VFO-B)[RX] Button
[SPLIT] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
QUICK POINTS:
 The operating mode applied to the VFO-B register
will be the same as that in use on the VFO-A register.
 The offset of the VFO-B from the VFO-A is programmed via the Menu, and is set to +5 kHz at the
factory. Other offsets may be selected using the following procedure:

1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select
Menu item “037 GENE Q SPLIT”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the
desired offset.
The available selections are –20kHz ~ +20kHz (factory default: +5 kHz).
4. When you have completed all adjustments, press
and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation.
If you only press the [MENU] button briefly to exit,
any changes you performed will not be stored.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Page 85
CW MODE OPERATION
The powerful CW operating capabilities of the FTDX5000 include operation using both an electronic keyer paddle and a
“straight key” or emulation thereof, as is provided by a computer-based keying device.
SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY (AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION) OPERATION
Before starting, connect your key line(s) to the front and/or rear panel KEY jack(s). Be sure the [KEYER] button on the
front panel is turned off for now.
[MONI] Button
[RF PWR] Knob
[A] Button
[B] Button
[MONI] Knob
1. Press the [CW] mode button
to engage CW operation.
The “
” and “
”
icons will appear in the display. The “
” icon
will also appear in the display; and the CW monitor is
activated.
ADVICE:
 The operating mode
is selected using the
[ MODE ] button.
The VFO, to which
the selection is applied, is selected by the [A] or [B] button (located
to the upper left of the Main Tuning Dial knob).
Usually, the [A] button glows red, signifying VFOA is being adjusted. Alternately, pressing the [B]
button will cause its indicator to glows orange, signifying VFO-B adjustment. Therefore, press the [A]
or [B] button to select the desired VFO, then press
the [CW] button to select the CW mode.
 After initially selecting CW, if you press the [CW]
button once more, you will engage the “CW Reverse” mode (see page 92). Normally, the upper
sideband (USB) is used in conjunction with CW.
In reverse CW the lower sideband (LSB) is used.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired
operating frequency.
Page 86
[MODE] Buttons
[BK-IN] Button
Main Tuning Dial knob
3. Press the [ BK-IN ] button
briefly, to engage automatic
activation of the transmitter
when you close the CW key.
The “
” icon will appear
in the display.
ADVICE:
 When you close your CW
key, the transmitter will automatically be activated,
and the CW carrier will be transmitted. When you
release the key, transmission will cease after a brief
delay; the delay time is user-programmable, per the
discussion on page 93.
 As shipped from the factory, the FTDX5000 TX/
RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-breakin” operation. However, using Menu item “063 A1A
BK-IN”, you may change this setup for full breakin (QSK) operation, whereby the switching is quick
enough to hear incoming signals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of your transmission. This
may prove very useful during contest and traffichandling operations.
4. Operation using your CW key may now proceed.
A CW sidetone sounds from a speaker
in accordance with your keying. Adjust the [MONI] knob for a comfortable listening level of the CW
sidetone.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
SETUP FOR STRAIGHT KEY (AND STRAIGHT KEY EMULATION) OPERATION
ADVICE:
 You may disable the CW sidetone by pressing the
[MONI] button. The “
” icon will turn off, confirming that the Monitor is now disengaged.
 If you set the [BK-IN] button to off, you may practice
your sending without having the signal go out over the
air (sidetone only).
 If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the
ALC meter reading will increase. This is normal and
does not indicate any problem whatsoever (because increased ALC voltage is being used to lower the power).
NOTE:
 Use only a 3-pin (“stereo”) 1/4” phone plug; a 2-pin
plug will place a short between the ring and (grounded)
shaft of the plug, resulting in a constant “key-down”
condition in some circumstances.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
TERMINOLOGY:
Semi-break-in
This is a pseudo- “VOX” mode used on CW, where
the closure of the CW key will engage the transmitter.
Releasing the key, will allow the receiver to recover
after a short delay. No signals will be heard between
the spaces between dots and dashes (unless the sending speed is extremely slow).
Full break-in
Full break-in (Also known as “Full QSK”) involves
very fast switching between transmit and receive, such
that incoming signals may be heard between the dots
and dashes as you send them. This allows you to hear a
station that suddenly starts transmitting on your frequency, while you are in the midst of sending a message.
Page 87
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
Connect the cable from your keyer paddle to the front or rear panel KEY jack.
[MONI] Button
[RF PWR] Knob
[MONI] Knob
[SPEED] Knob
[A] Button
[B] Button
[KEYER] Button
[BK-IN] Button
Main Tuning Dial knob
1. Press the [CW] mode button
to engage CW operation.
” and “
”
The “
icons will appear in the display, and the CW monitor
will be activated.
ADVICE:
 The operating mode
is selected using the
[ MODE ] button.
The (A or B) VFO to
which the selection
is applied, is selected by the [A] or
[B] button, located to the upper left of the Main
Tuning Dial knob. Usually, the [A] button glows
red, signifying VFO-A is being adjusted. Alternately, pressing the [B] button will cause its indicator to glow orange, signifying VFO-B adjustment.
Therefore, press the [A] or [B] button to select the
desired VFO, then press the [CW] button to select
the CW mode.
 After initially selecting CW, If you press the [CW]
button once more you will engage the “CW Reverse” mode (see page 92), whereby the “opposite” sideband injection is used. Normally, the upper sideband (USB) is used in conjunction with CW.
In reverse CW the lower sideband (LSB) is used.
The “
” and “
” icons will appear if you
select CW Reverse.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to select the desired
operating frequency.
Page 88
[MODE] Buttons
3. Press the [KEYER] button.
The “
” icon will appear in the display, confirming that the built-in Electronic Keyer is now active.
4. Rotate the [SPEED] knob to
set the desired sending speed
(4 ~ 60 wpm). Clockwise rotation of the [SPEED] knob will increase the keying speed.
ADVICE:
 The keying speed will show for 3
seconds in the lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the outer [SPEED] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3-second display feature
via Menu item “017 DISP LVL IND” See page
122 for details.
 When you press either the “Dot” or “Dash” side of
your paddle, the transmitter will automatically be
activated.
5. If you press the [BK-IN] button briefly, “semi-breakin” operation (discussed previously) will be engaged.
6. CW operation utilizing your paddle may now commence.
A CW sidetone sounds from a speaker
in accordance with your keying. Adjust the [MONI] knob for a comfortable listening level of the CW
sidetone.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
ADVICE:
 You may disable the CW sidetone by pressing the
[MONI] button. The “
” icon will turn off, confirming that the Monitor is now disengaged.
 When you utilize your keyer paddle, the transmitter
will automatically be activated, and the CW characters (or a string of dots and dashes) will be transmitted. When you release the keyer paddle contacts, transmission will cease after a brief delay. The delay time is
user-programmable, per the discussion on page 93.
 If you reduce power using the [RF PWR] knob, the
ALC meter reading will increase. This is normal and
does not indicate any problem whatsoever (because increased ALC voltage is being used to lower the power).
Full Break-in (QSK) Operation
As shipped from the factory, the FTDX5000 TX/RX system for CW is configured for “Semi-break-in” operation.
However, using Menu item “063 A1A BK-IN”, you may
change this setup for full break-in (QSK) operation,
whereby the switching is quick enough to hear incoming
signals in the spaces between the dots and dashes of your
transmission.
1. Press the [MENU] button to enter the Menu mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “063 A1A BK-IN”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set this Menu
FULL
item to “FULL
FULL”.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Page 89
CW MODE OPERATION
USING THE BUILT-IN ELECTRONIC KEYER
A number of interesting and useful features are available during Electronic Keyer operation.
SETTING THE KEYER WEIGHT (DOT/SPACE:DASH) RATIO
The Menu may be used to adjust the Weight for the built-in Electronic Keyer. The default weighting is 3:1 (a dash is
three times longer than a dot or space).
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select
Menu item “065 A1A WEIGHT”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set the
weight to the desired value. The available adjustment range is for a Dot/Space:Dash ratio of “2.5”
~ “4.5” (default value: “3.0”).
4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
[MENU] button for two seconds to save the new
setting and exit to normal operation.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
SELECTING THE KEYER OPERATING MODE
The configuration of the Electronic Keyer may be customized independently for the front and rear KEY jacks of the
FTDX5000. This permits utilization of Automatic Character Spacing (ACS), if desired, as well as the use of the
electronic keyer via the front jack and a straight key or computer-driven keying line via the rear panel.
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[ SELECT ] knob to select
Menu item “057 A1A F-TYPE” (for the front KEY
jack) or “059 A1A R-TYPE” (for the rear-panel
KEY jack).
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set the
keyer to the desired mode. The available selections
are:
OFF
OFF:
The built-in Electronic Keyer is turned off
(“straight key” mode).
BUG
BUG:
Dots will be generated automatically by
the keyer, but dashes must be sent manually.
ELEKEY
ELEKEY: Both dots and dashes will be generated
automatically when you use your paddle.
ACS
ELEKEY
ACS:
Same as “ELEKEY
ELEKEY” except that the spacing between characters is precisely set by
the keyer to be the same length as a dash
(three dots in length)
4. When you are finished, press and hold in the
[MENU] button for two seconds to save the new
setting and exit to normal operation.
Page 90
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button (VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
ACS “OFF”
Morse
“E” & “T”
Inter-character
spacing to short
ACS “ON”
Morse
“E” & “T”
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CW SPOTTING (ZERO-BEATING)
“Spotting” (zeroing in on another CW station) is a handy technique for ensuring that you and the other station are precisely
on the same frequency.
For everyday operation, the (CW) [PITCH] knob allows you to set the center of the receiver passband, as well as the offset
pitch of your CW carrier signal, to the tone pitch you prefer to listen to.
The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may also be moved so you can adjust your receiver frequency to center the
incoming station on the pitch corresponding to that of your transmitted signal.
Using the SPOT System
While pressing the front panel [SPOT] button, the spot
tone will be heard in the speaker, and the spot tone frequency will show in the lower right corner of the Main
Display. This tone corresponds to the pitch of your transmitted signal, and if you adjust the receiver frequency to
match the pitch of the received CW signal to that of the
spot tone, your transmitted signal will be precisely matched
to that of the other station.
Release the [SPOT] button to turn the spot tone off.
ADVICE:
 In a tough DX pile-up, you may actually want to use
the SPOT system to find a “gap” in the spread of calling stations, instead of zeroing in precisely on the last
station being worked by the DX station. From the DX
side, if a dozen or more operators (also using Yaesu’s
SPOT system) all call precisely on the same frequency,
their dots and dashes merge into a single, long tone
that the DX station cannot decipher. In such situations,
calling slightly higher or lower may get your call
through.
 The Tuning Offset Indicator in the display may be utilized for CW frequency adjustment, as well. Its configuration is set via Menu item “012 DISP BAR SEL”
at the factory, and the Tuning Offset Indicator is already set to the “CW TUNE” selection.
Retune:
Shift to Higher Frequency
Zero-In
Retune:
Shift to Lower Frequency
[SPOT] Button
[PICTH] Knob
QUICK POINTS:
 The CW spotting process utilizes the spot tone or the
Tuning Offset Indicator, with the actual offset pitch
being set by the [PITCH] knob on the front panel. The
offset pitch may be set to any frequency between 300
Hz and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps, and you can either
match tones audibly (using the [SPOT] button) or align
the receiver frequency so that the central red bar on
the Tuning Offset Indicator lights up. Note that there
are 21 “dots” on the Tuning Offset Indicator, and depending on the resolution selected, the incoming CW
signal may fall outside the visible range of the bar indicator, if you are not reasonably close to the proper
alignment of tones.
 The displayed frequency on CW, normally reflects the
“zero beat” frequency of your offset carrier. That is, if
you were to listen on USB on 14.100.70 MHz to a
signal with a 700 Hz offset, the “zero beat” frequency
of that CW carrier would be 14.000.70 MHz. The latter frequency is what the FTDX5000 displays, by default. However, you can change the display to be identical to what you would see on SSB by using Menu
FREQ
item “066 A1A FRQ DISP” and setting it to “FREQ
FREQ”
PITCH
instead of its default “PITCH
PITCH” setting.
: When the CW reversefeature is activated, the indicator of the Tuning Offset Indicator will also be reversed.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 91
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
USING CW REVERSE
If you experience a difficult interference situation, where an interfering station cannot readily be eliminated, you may wish
to try receiving using the opposite sideband. This may move the interfering station’s frequency in a direction that may lend
itself more readily to rejection.
1. To start, let’s use a typical example where you have set
the CW mode (using the default “USB” injection) on
the VFO-A receiver.
2. Now be sure your mode selection is still set for the
VFO-A register, and press the [CW] mode button once
more. The “
” and “
” icons will appear in the
display, indicating that the “LSB” injection side has
now been selected.
3. When using Dual Receive, press the [B] button, which
is located to the upper left of the Main Tuning Dial
knob. Then press the [CW] button to engage CW Reverse on the VFO-B receiver, in exactly the same way
as for the VFO-A receiver.
4. Press the [CW] mode button once more to return to
the normal (USB) injection side and cancel CW Reverse operation (the “
” and “
” icons will
appear in the display).
NOTES:
 When CW Reverse is engaged, the Tuning Offset Indicator action will concurrently be reversed.
 When the incoming signal pitch tone is properly
aligned, the central red marker lights up whether or
not CW Reverse is engaged.
[A], [B] Button
[CW] Button
[PICTH] Knob
In the illustration, Figure “A” demonstrates the normal CW injection setup, using the USB side. In
Figure “B”, CW Reverse has been engaged. LSBside injection is being used to eliminate interference.
The beneficial effect of switching sidebands can
be clearly seen in this example.
A
Normal CW
( USB )
Carrier
QRM
RX Passband
Retune:
Shift to Lower Frequency
B
Carrier
CW Reverse
( LSB )
Zero-In
QRM
Retune:
Shift to Higher Frequency
RX Passband
AUDIO PEAK FILTER
1. Where you have set the CW mode on the VFO-A receiver, press the (VFO-A)[CONT/APF] button briefly,
to activate the APF (Audio Peak Filter) which provides
a very narrow audio bandwidth. The peak position of
the APF will appear in the SUB DISPLAY-II window, and the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob will now function as the APF knob.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to the left or right
to reduce any interference.
3. To disable the APF, press the (VFO-A)[CONT/APF]
button briefly, again.
4. To activate the APF (Audio Peak Filter) on VFO-B,
press the (VFO-B)[CONT/APF] button briefly, and
adjust the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to reduce any interference. The peak position of the APF will be indicated in the SUB DISPLAY-III window.
Page 92
(VFO-B)[CONT/APF] Button
(VFO-A)[CONT/APF] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CW DELAY TIME SETTING
During semi-break-in (not QSK) operation, the hang time of the transmitter, after you have finished sending, may be
adjusted to a comfortable value consistent with your sending speed. This is the functional equivalent to the “VOX Delay”
adjustment used on voice modes, and the delay may be varied anywhere between 20 milli-seconds with the ([DELAY]
knob set fully counter-clockwise) and 5 seconds (fully clockwise).
1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable CW transmission
SEMI
(Menu item “063 A1A BK-IN” must be set to “SEMI
SEMI”).
2. Start sending, and adjust the [DELAY] knob so that
the hang time is as you prefer for comfortable operation.
ADVICE:
The delay time will show for 3 seconds in the lower
right corner of the Main Display whenever the outer
[DELAY] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be
changed to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window
via Menu item “018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you
may disable the 3-second display feature via Menu item
“017 DISP LVL IND” See page 122 for details.
[BK-IN] Button
[DELAY] Knob
CW PITCH ADJUSTMENT
Rotation of the front panel’s [PITCH] knob will allow
adjustment of the center frequency of the receiver passband, as well as the pitch of your offset CW carrier, to the
tone you prefer. The tone may be varied between 300 Hz
and 1050 Hz, in 50 Hz steps.
ADVICE:
The spot tone frequency will show for 3 seconds in the
lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the outer
[PROC] knob is turned.
Alternately, the 3-second display feature may be changed
to show in the SUB DISPLAY-III window via Menu item
“018 DISP INDI”. Additionally, you may disable the 3second display feature via Menu item “017 DISP LVL
IND” See page 122 for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[PICTH] Knob
TERMINOLOGY:
CW Pitch: If you tuned to an exact “zero beat” on an
incoming CW signal, you could not copy it (“Zero beat”
implies a 0 Hz tone). Therefore, the receiver is offset several hundred Hz (typically), to produce an audio tone your
ear can detect. The BFO offset associated with this tuning
(that produces the comfortable audio tone) is called the
CW Pitch.
Page 93
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
The FTDX5000 in capable of the automatic sending of CW messages (as you might do in a contest) by plugging the
supplied FH-2 Remote Control Keypad into the rear panel REMOTE jack. Two techniques for message storage are available: you may either send the desired message contents using your keyer paddle (“Message Memory”), or you may input
the text characters using the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob and (VFO-B)[SELECT] knobs (“Text Memory”).
MESSAGE Memory
Five memory channels capable of retaining 50 characters total are provided (using the PARIS standard for character and
word length).
Example: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K (19 characters)
-- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • -- • -- -- • -- -- • •
•
• -- ---- •••• -- • •
(Q )
(C)
(Q)
(C)
( Q)
( D) ( E ) ( W) ( 6 )
(C)
-- •• -- -- • -- •
( D) ( X)
-- • -(C)
(K )
STORING A MESSAGE INTO MEMORY
MESSAGE MEMORY PROGRAMMING (USING YOUR PADDLE)
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select the CW
Memory Register you wish to store the message into.
For now we are just selecting the message entry technique (Keyer entry).
025 KEY CW MEM1
026 KEY CW MEM2
027 KEY CW MEM3
028 KEY CW MEM4
029 KEY CW MEM5
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set the selected
MESSAGE
Memory Register to “MESSAGE
MESSAGE”. If you want to use
your keyer paddle for message entry on all memories,
MESSAGE
set all five Menu items (#025 ~ 029) to “MESSAGE
MESSAGE”.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new settings and exit.
1. Set the operating mode to CW.
2. Set the [BK-IN] button to Off.
3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer “on” by pressing
the [KEYER] button briefly, if necessary.
4. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key.
LOCK
ON
5. Press the [1] ~ [5] key on the FH-2 to
begin the memory storage process.
OFF
LOCK
ON
OFF
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
6. Send the desired message using your keyer paddle.
7. Press the [MEM] key on the FH-2 once
more at the end of your message. Up to
50 characters may be stored among the
five memories.
LOCK
ON
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
TERMINOLOGY:
PARIS Word Length: By convention in the Amateur
industry (utilized by ARRL and others), the length of one
“word” of CW is defined as the length of the Morse Code
characters spelling the word “PARIS.” This character (dot/
dash/space) length is used for the rigorous definition of
code speed in “words per minute.”
Page 94
OFF
NOTE:
 You must exercise care in sending to ensure that the
spaces between letters and words are accurately done.
If your timing is off, the spacing may not come out
right in the stored message.
 For ease in setting up the keyer memories, we recommend you set Menu item “057 A1A F-TYPE” and/or
ACS
“059 A1A R-TYPE” to “ACS
ACS” (Automatic Character
Spacing) while you are programming the keyer memories.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
CHECKING THE CW MEMORY CONTENTS
ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned “off” by the [BKIN] button.
2. Press the [MONI] button to enable the CW monitor.
3. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to check
your work. You will hear the results in
the sidetone, but no RF energy will be
transmitted.
1. Press the [BK-IN] button to enable transmission. Either Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged, depending on the setting of Menu item “063 A1A BK-IN”.
2. Press an FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the programmed message.
NOTE:
Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.
NOTE:
If you subsequently decide to use the “Text Memory” technique for message storage, on a particular memory register, the contents of a message stored using the keyer paddle
input will not be transferred over when the Menu Mode
TEXT
Setting is changed to “TEXT
TEXT”).
LOCK
ON
OFF
LOCK
ON
OFF
Transmitting in the Beacon Mode
It is possible to automatically transmit a “Beacon” message repetitively. The message may be input either with the
keyer paddle, or programmed using the MENU “TEXT” input method. The time delay between message repeats
may be set anywhere between 1 ~ 690 seconds (1 ~ 240 seconds (1 sec/step) or 270 ~ 690 seconds (30 sec/step)) via
Menu item “022 KEY BEACON”. If you do not wish the “Beacon” message to repeat, then, set this Menu item to
“OFF”. Press a [1] ~ [5] key on the FH-2 Remote Control Keypad, to select the register into which the Beacon
message was stored. Repetitive transmissions of the Beacon message will begin. Press one of these keys once more
to halt the Beacon transmissions.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 95
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
CONTEST MEMORY KEYER
TEXT Memory
The four channels of CW message memory (up to 50 characters total) may also be programmed using the text-entry
technique. This is somewhat slower than sending the message directly from your keyer paddle, but accuracy of character
spacing is ensured. Example 1: CQ CQ CQ DE W6DXC K} (20 characters)
You may also utilize another powerful feature of the CW Memory Keyer, the sequential Contest Number (“Countup”)
feature. Example 2: 599 10 200 # K} (15 characters)
STORING TEXT INTO MEMORY
TEXT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select the CW
Memory Register you wish to store the message in.
For now, you are just selecting the message entry technique (Text entry).
025 KEY CW MEM1
026 KEY CW MEM2
027 KEY CW MEM3
028 KEY CW MEM4
029 KEY CW MEM5
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set the selected
TEXT
Memory Register to “TEXT
TEXT”. If you want to use the
Text method for message entry on all memories, set all
TEXT
five Menu items (#025 ~ 029) to “TEXT
TEXT”.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new settings and exit.
1. Set the operating mode to CW.
2. Set the [BK-IN] button to “off”.
3. Turn the internal Electronic Keyer “on” by briefly
pressing the [KEYER] button.
4. Press the FH-2’s [MEM] key.
LOCK
ON
5. Press the [1] ~ [5] key on the FH-2 to
begin the memory storage process.
OFF
LOCK
ON
OFF
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
6. Use the FH-2’s [ ] and [ ] keys to
set the cursor position and use the []
and [] keys to choose the letter/number to be programmed in each slot of
the memory. In the case of the second
example above, the “#” character designates the slot where the Contest Number will appear.
ADVICE:
You may set the cursor position with the ( VFOA)[SELECT] knob, and then choose the letter/number with the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob.
LOCK
ON
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
CW Memory Register Number
Current Cursor Position
Select the cursor position
Page 96
OFF
Message
Cursor
Choose the letter/number
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
CW CONVENIENCE FEATURES
7. When the message is complete, add the “}” character
at the end to signify the termination of the message.
8. Press and hold in the FH-2 [MEM] key
for 2 seconds to exit, once all characters (including “}”) have been programmed.
LOCK
ON
OFF
CHECKING
THE
CW MEMORY CONTENTS
1. Be sure that Break-in is still turned “off” by the [BKIN] button.
2. Press the [MONI] button briefly, to enable the CW
monitor.
3. Press an FH-2 [1] ~ [5] key to check
your work. You will hear the stored
message with the CW monitor sidetone,
but no RF energy will be transmitted.
LOCK
ON
TEXT CW CODE TEXT CW CODE TEXT CW CODE TEXT CW CODE
(
/
@
!
SN
KN
DN
@
“””
AF
“)”
KK
“:”
OS
“[ ”
--\
#
----;
KR
AL
]
$
SX
+
AR
<
----%
,
=
^
KA
MIM
BT
--_
&
AS
--DU
>
--IQ
‘’’
WG
.
AAA
?
IMI
‘} ’
---
*
OFF
NOTE:
Adjust the monitor level using the [MONI] knob.
ON-THE-AIR CW MESSAGE PLAYBACK
1. Press the [BK-IN] button briefly to enable transmission. Either Full- or Semi-break-in will be engaged depending on the setting of Menu item “063 A1A BKIN.”
2. Press the FH-2’s [1] ~ [5] key to transmit the programmed message.
LOCK
ON
OFF
NOTE:
If you subsequently decide to use the “Message Memory”
technique for message storage, on a particular memory
register, the contents of the message stored using text input will not be transferred over when you select the “Message Memory” technique (the Menu Mode Setting is set
MESSAGE
to “MESSAGE
MESSAGE”).
Contest Number Programming
Use this process if you are starting a contest, or if
you somehow get out of sync with the proper number in the middle of a contest.
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the
Menu mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select
Menu item “024 KEY CONTEST”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set the
Contest Number to the desired value.
ADVICE:
Press the [CLEAR ] button briefly (located
above the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob), to reset the
1”.
Contest Number to “1
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two
seconds to store the new number and exit to
normal operation.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Decrementing the Contest Number
Use this process if the current contest number gets
ahead of the actual number you want to send (in
case of a duplicate QSO, for example).
Press the FH-2 control’s [DEC] key.
The current Contest Number will be
reduced by one. Press the [DEC]
button briefly, as many times as necessary, to reach the desired number.
If you go too far, use the “Contest
Number Programming” technique
desireded at the left.
LOCK
ON
OFF
Page 97
FM MODE OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
[MOX] Button
[METER] Switch
[A] Button
[B] Button
[MIC] Knob
[RF PWR] Knob
1. To select the FM operating
mode, press the [AM/FM]
button several times, until
the “
” icon appears in
the display, .
ADVICE:
 The operating mode is
selected using the
[ MODE ] button,
and then pressing the
[ A ] or [ B ] button
(located to the upper
left of the Main Tuning Dial knob), to
choose VFO-A or VFO-B, to which the selection is
applied. Usually, the [A] button glows red, signifying VFO-A is being adjusted. Similarly, pressing
the [B] button will cause its indicator to glow orange, signifying VFO-B adjustment. Therefore,
press the [A] or [B] button to select the desired
VFO, then press the [AM/FM] button to select the
FM mode.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob (in the case of VFOA operation) to tune the desired operating frequency.
Pressing the microphone [UP] or [DWN] button will
cause the frequency to change in 5 kHz steps.
3. Press the microphone PTT switch (or press the front
panel [MOX] button) to transmit. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice level. Release the PTT or
[MOX] switch to return to receive.
Page 98
[MODE] Buttons
Main Tuning Dial knob
4. There are two methods of adjusting the microphone
gain for FM operation. At the factory, a default level
has been programmed that should be satisfactory for
most situations. However, using Menu item “079 F3E
MICGAIN”, you may set a different fixed value, or
MCVR
you may choose the “MCVR
MCVR” option which then lets
you use the front panel [MIC] knob to set the microphone gain in the FM mode.
ADVICE:
 The Transmit Monitor is another helpful way of verifying proper adjustment of the FM MIC Gain. By pressing the [MONI] button, and then adjusting the [MONI]
knob for a comfortable listening level while you are
transmitting, you will be able to hear the difference in
deviation as you make adjustments.
 FM is only used in the 28 MHz and 50 MHz Amateur
bands covered in the FTDX5000. Please do not use
FM on any other bands.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
FM MODE OPERATION
REPEATER OPERATION
The FTDX5000 may be utilized on 29 MHz and 50 MHz repeaters.
1. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to the output frequency (downlink) from the repeater.
2. If CTCSS Tone operation is desired/needed, press and
hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds to engage the CTCSS mode.
3. Within 5 seconds of pressing of the [AM/FM] button:
 Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select the
desired CTCSS mode. If you just need to send the
T.ENC
uplink encoding tone, select “T.ENC
T.ENC”. For encode/
T.SQL
decode operation, choose “T.SQL
T.SQL” instead. The
available choices are
OFF
T.ENC
T.SQL
OFF
“OFF
OFF”  “T.ENC
T.ENC”  “T.SQL
T.SQL”  “OFF
OFF”.
 Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the
desired CTCSS Tone to be used. A total of 50 standard CTCSS tones are provided (see the CTCSS
Tone Chart).
 Press the [AM/FM] button briefly, to select the desired repeater shift direction. The selections are
RPT SIMP (not used on a repeater)”  “RPT
RPT +
“RPT
+” 
RPT –
RPT SIMP (not used on a repeater)”.
“RPT
–”  “RPT
4. Press and hold in the [AM/FM] button for two seconds
to exit from the repeater setup mode.
5. Close the microphone PTT switch (or press the [MOX]
button) to begin transmission. You will observe that
the frequency has shifted to correspond with the programming you set up in the previous steps. Speak into
the microphone in a normal voice level, and then release the PTT switch or [MOX] button to return to the
receive mode.
Repeater Shift Direction
Select the Repeater Shift Direction
CTCSS Mode
CTCSS Tone
Select the CTCSS Mode Select the CTCSS Tone
67.0
88.5
114.8
151.4
177.3
203.5
250.3
69.3
91.5
118.8
156.7
179.9
206.5
251.4
CTCSS TONE FREQUENCY (Hz)
71.9
74.4
77.0
79.7
94.8
97.4 100.0 103.5
123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5
159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9
183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8
210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1
82.5
107.2
141.3
171.3
196.6
233.6
85.4
110.9
146.2
173.8
199.5
241.8
ADVICE:
The conventional repeater shift used on 29 MHz is 100 kHz, while on the 50 MHz band the shift may vary between 500 kHz
and 1.7 MHz (or more). To program the proper repeater shift, use Menu items “081 F3E 28 RPT” (28 MHz) and “082 F3E
50 RPT” (50 MHz), as appropriate.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 99
MEMORY OPERATION
CONVENIENT MEMORY FUNCTIONS
01
99
The FTDX5000 contains ninety-nine regular memories, labeled “01
01” through “99
99”; nine specialy programmed limit memory
P1L
P1U
P9L
P9U
C-1
pairs, labeled “P1L
P1L/P1U
P1U” through “P9L
P9L/P9U
P9U”; and five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories, labeled “C-1
C-1” through
C-5
“C-5
C-5”. Each memory location not only stores the VFO-A frequency and mode, but also stores the various settings shown
below. By default the 99 regular memories are contained in one group. However, they can be arranged in up to six separate
groups, if desired.
QUICK POINT:
The FTDX5000’s memory channels store the following data (in addition to the operating frequency):
 Frequency
 Mode
 Clarifier status and its Offset Frequency
 ANT status
 ATT status
 IPO status
 VRF status
 Roofing filter status and its Bandwidth
 Noise Blanker status
 CONTOUR status and its Peak Frequency
 DSP Noise Reduction (DNR) status and its Reduction algorithm selection.
 DSP Notch filter (NOTCH) status
 NAR bandwidth status
 DSP Auto Notch filter (DNF) status
 Repeater Shift Direction and CTCSS Tone Frequency
IMPOTANT NOTE
On rare occasions the stored data may become corrupted by miss operation, or static electricity. When
repairs are made, the memory data may be lost.
Please write down or record the memory information so you will be able to restore it if needed.
Page 100
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
QMB (QUICK MEMORY BANK)
C-1
C-5
The Quick Memory Bank consists of five memories (labeled “C-1
C-1” through “C-5
C-5.”) independent from the regular and PMS
memories. These can quickly store operating parameters for later recall.
QMB Channel Storage
1. Tune to the desired frequency on VFO-A.
2. Press the blue [STO] button briefly. The
“beep” will confirm that the contents of
VFO-A have been written to the currently
available QMB memory.
3 If you repeatedly press the [STO] button, the QMB
memories will be written in the following order:
[STO] Button
C-2  C-3  C-4  C-5  C-1 ......
Once all five QMB memories have data in them, previous
C-1
data (starting with channel “C-1
C-1”) will be over-written, on
a first-in, first-out basis.
QMB Channel Recall
1. Press the blue [RCL] button briefly. The
current QMB channel data will be shown
on the VFO-A frequency display field,
and the QMB memory channel number will appear in the small window at
the lower right corner of the display.
2. Repeatedly pressing the [RCL ] button will rotate
through the QMB channels:
C-2  C-3  C-4  C-5  C-1 ......
3. Press the [V/M] button briefly, to return to the VFO or
Memory mode.
[RCL] Button
[V/M] Button
ADVICE:
Rotating the Main Tuning Dial knob, or changing the operating mode will place the transceiver in the “Memory
Tune” mode. This is a temporary “pseudo-VFO” method
of tuning off of a stored memory channel. If you do not
over-write the contents of the current memory channel,
the original contents will not be disturbed by the initiation
of Memory Tune operation.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 101
MEMORY OPERATION
REGULAR MEMORY OPERATION
The Regular Memory of the FTDX5000 allows storage and recall of up to 99 memories, each storing frequency, mode, and
a wide variety of status information detailed previously. Memories may be grouped into as many as six Memory Groups.
Additionally, you get nine pairs of band-limit (PMS) memories, and five QMB (Quick Memory Bank) memories.
Memory Storage
1. Set VFO-A up with frequency, mode, and status information, the way you want to have it stored.
2. Press the [A M] button briefly (the current channel
number will start blinking in the small window at the
lower right corner of the display), and the contents of
the current memory channel will be shown on the SUB
DISPLAY-I.
3. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the memory
channel onto which you wish to store the data. If you
have selected a channel in which data is already stored,
that frequency will appear on the SUB DISPLAY-I
window.
4. Press and hold in the [A M] button for two seconds
to store the frequency and other data into the selected
memory channel. A double beep will confirm that you
have held the [AM] button in long enough.
[AM] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
Memory Channel Recall
1. Press the [V/M] button briefly, if necessary, to enter
the Memory mode. The memory channel data will be
shown on the VFO-A frequency display field, and the
“
” icon and memory channel number will appear
in the small window at the lower right corner of the
display.
2. Press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button for two seconds. The [BAND/MCH] button glows yellow, indicating that you are ready to select a memory channel
using the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
3. After pressing the [BAND/MCH] button, you may rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the desired
memory channel.
[CLAR/GRP] Button
[BAND/MCH] Button
[V/M] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
ADVICE:
To work within a particular Memory Group (described on
page 105), press and hold the [CLAR/GRP] button for
two seconds (the button will glow yellow), then rotate the
[CLAR (VFO-B )] knob to select the desired Memory
Group. Now press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button for
two seconds (the [BAND/MCH] button will glow yellow).
You may now choose the memory channel within the selected Memory Group.
Page 102
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
REGULAR MEMORY OPERATION
Checking a Memory Channel’s Status
Before programming a channel into memory, you can check the current contents of that channel without the danger of
overwriting the channel accidentally.
1. Press the [AM] button briefly.
The data stored in the currently-selected memory channel will be displayed in the SUB DISPLAY-I window. However, since you are only checking the contents of the memory channel, your radio will not have
moved to the memory channel’s frequency.
2. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select a different
memory channel. To exit from the Memory Check
mode, press the [AM] button briefly, once more.
[AM] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
ADVICE:
 While the Memory Check function is engaged, the
memory channel number will blink in the multi-panel
window.
 While operating in the VFO mode, using Memory
Check, you may store the current contents of the VFOA register into the selected memory by pressing and
holding in the [A M] button for two seconds (listen
for the double beep). Conversely, if you wish to write
the contents of the current memory into the VFO-A
register, press and hold in the [M A] button for two
seconds.
Erasing Memory Channel Data
1. Press the [AM] button briefly.
The data stored in the currently-selected memory channel will be displayed in the SUB DISPLAY-I window.
2. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the memory
channel that you would like to erase.
3. Press the [LOCK] button briefly, to erase the contents
of the selected memory channel.
ADVICE:
 After erasure, only the memory channel number will
remain. The frequency data will disappear from the
display.
 If you make a mistake and wish to restore the memory
contents, just repeat steps (1) through (3) above.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[LOCK] Button
[AM] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
Page 103
MEMORY OPERATION
REGULAR MEMORY OPERATION
Moving Memory Data to the VFO-A
You may transfer the contents of the currently selected memory channel into the Main band (VFO-A) register, if you like.
1. Press the [V/M] button briefly, as necessary, to enter
the Memory mode. The memory channel number will
appear in the small window at the lower right corner of
the display.
2. Press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button for two second. The [BAND/MCH] button will glow yellow, indicating that you are ready to select a memory channel
using the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
3. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the memory
channel you wish to transfer to VFO-A.
4. Press and hold in the [MA] button for two seconds,
until you hear the double beep. The data in the selected
memory channel will now be transferred to the VFOA.
[V/M] Button
[BAND/MCH] Button
[MA] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
ADVICE:
The transfer of data to the VFO-A does not affect the original contents of the memory channel. This is a “copy” function that leaves the memory contents unchanged.
Memory Tune Operation
You may freely tune the frequency off of any memory channel in a “Memory Tune” mode. This is similar to VFO operation.
So long as you do not over-write the contents of the current memory, Memory Tune operation will not alter the contents of
the memory channel.
1. Press the [V/M] button briefly, to recall any memory
channel.
2. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob and you will see
that the memory channel frequency is changing.
ADVICE:
 The “
” icon will replace the “
” icon in
the small window at the lower right corner of the
display, indicating you are in the “Memory Tune”
mode.
 During Memory Tune operation, you may change
operating modes, and engage the Clarifier, if desired.
3. Press the [V/M] button briefly to return to the originally-memorized frequency of the current memory
channel. One more brief press of the [V/M] button will
return you to VFO operation.
[V/M] Button
Main Tuning Dial Knob
NOTE:
Computer software programs utilizing the CAT system
interface port may presume that the transceiver is operating in the VFO mode for certain features like “band mapping” and/or frequency logging. Because the “Memory
Tune” mode so closely resembles the VFO mode, be sure
that you have the FTDX5000 operating in a control mode
compatible with your software requirements. Use the VFO
mode if you’re not sure.
Page 104
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MEMORY OPERATION
MEMORY GROUPS
Memory channels may be grouped into as many as six convenient batches, for easy identification and selection. For example, you might want to set aside memory groups for AM BC stations, shortwave broadcast stations, contest frequencies,
repeater frequencies, and PMS limits, or any other groupings you like.
Each memory group is capable of holding up to 19 or 20 memory channels (the Group size is fixed). When a memory
channel is grouped, the channel numbers change to correspond to the chart below:
Memory Group Assignment
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “036 GENE MEM GRP”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set this Menu
ENABLE
DISABLE
item to “ENABLE
ENABLE” (the default setting is “DISABLE
DISABLE”).
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit. Operation will now be
restricted to the six Memory Groups.
To cancel Memory Group operation, repeat steps (1)
DISABLE
through (4) above, choosing “DISABLE
DISABLE” in step (3).
ADVICE
Note that for the PMS memory group, the PMS memories
P1L
P9U
“P1L
P1L” through “P9U
P9U” will be so designated, to avoid confusion.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER
GROUP MEMORY “OFF”
GROUP MEMORY “ON”
01 ~ 19
1-01 ~ 1-19
20 ~ 39
2-01 ~ 2-20
40 ~ 59
3-01 ~ 3-20
60 ~ 79
4-01 ~ 4-20
80 ~ 99
5-01 ~ 5-20
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
P-1L/1U ~ P-9L/9U
Choosing the Desired Memory Group
You may recall memories just within a particular Memory
Group, if desired.
1. Press the [V/M] button briefly, if necessary to enter the
Memory mode.
2. Press and hold the [CLAR/GRP] button for two seconds. The [CLAR/GRP] button will glow yellow.
3. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the desired
Memory Group.
4. Press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button. The [BAND/
MCH] button will glow yellow.
5. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the desired
Memory Channel within the Selected Memory Group.
[CLAR/GRP] Button
[BAND/MCH] Button
[V/M] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
ADVICE:
If no channels have been assigned to a particular Memory
Group, you will not have access to that Group.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 105
OPERATION ON ALASKA EMERGENCY FREQUENCY: 5167.5 KH (U.S. VERSION ONLY)
Z
Section 97.401(d) of the regulations governing amateur radio in the United States permits emergency amateur communications on the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz by stations in (or within 92.6 km of) the state of Alaska. This frequency is only
to be used when the immediate safety of human life and/or property are threatened. It is never to be used for routine
communications.
The FTDX5000 includes the capability for transmission and reception on 5167.5 kHz under such emergency conditions via
the Menu system. To activate this feature:
1. Press the [MENU] button to briefly, enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select “177
TGEN EMRGNCY”.
EN3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select “ENABLE
ABLE”.
4. Press and hold in the [MENU] button for 2 seconds to
save the new setting and exit to normal operation. Emergency communication on this spot frequency is now
possible.
5. Press the [V/M ] button, as necessary, to enter the
Memory mode. Press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button (the imbedded LED glows yellow), then rotate the
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select the emergency chanE-US
P-9U
nel (“E-US
E-US”), which is found between channels “P-9U
P-9U”
01
and “01
01.”
NOTE:
 The receive-mode CLARIFIER functions normally
while using this frequency, but variation of the transmit frequency is not possible. Activation of “177 TGEN
EMRGNCY” does not enable any other out-of-amateur-band capability on the transceiver. The full specifications of the FTDX5000 are not necessarily guaranteed on this frequency. However, power output and receiver sensitivity should be fully satisfactory for the
purpose of emergency communication.
 If you wish to disable operation capability on the Alaska
Emergency Frequency, repeat the above procedures,
DISABLE
but set “177 TGEN EMRGNCY” to “DISABLE
DISABLE” in
step 3.
 In an emergency, note that a half-wave dipole cut for
this frequency should be approximately 45’3” on each
leg (90’6” total length). Emergency operation on
5167.5 kHz is shared with the Alaska-Fixed Service.
This transceiver is not authorized for operation under
the FCC’s Part 87 rules for aeronautical communications.
Page 106
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
[V/M] Button
[BAND/MCH] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
You may scan either the VFO or the memories of the FTDX5000. The radio will halt scanning on any station with a signal
strong enough to open the receiver squelch.
VFO SCANNING
1. Set the VFO to the frequency on which you would like
to begin scanning.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SQL] knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
ADVICE:
If you would like to scan on VFO-B, rotate the (VFOB)[SQL] knob so that the background noise is just silenced.
3. Press and hold in the microphone [UP] or [DWN] key
for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified direction on the VFO-A.
ADVICE:
If you would like to begin scanning on the VFO-B,
press the [B] button briefly, first (located to the upper
left of the Main Tuning Dial knob), then press and hold
in the microphone [UP] or [DWN] key for 1/2 second.
4. The scanner will now increment the frequency in the
chosen direction until a signal is detected. When a signal is encountered which opens the squelch, receiver
will respond differently, depending on the operating
mode:
 In the SSB/CW modes, the decimal points in the
frequency display area will blink and the scanner
will slow down (but does not stop).
 In the FM/AM modes, the transceiver pauses on
the signal and stays locked on its frequency for five
seconds. Thereafter, scanning will resume whether
or not the other station’s transmission has ended.
While the transceiver is in the “pause” condition,
the decimal points in the frequency display area
will blink. If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume.
5. To cancel scanning, press the microphone [UP] or
[DWN] key briefly.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
(VFO-B)[PICTH] Knob
MAIN BAND (VFO-A) SCANNING
[B] Button
(VFO-B)[PICTH] Knob
SUB BAND (VFO-B) SCANNING
ADVICE:
You may select the manner in which the scanner resumes
while it has paused on a signal in the FM/AM modes, using Menu item “045 GENE SCN RSM”. The default
TIME
“TIME
TIME” setting will cause the scanner to resume scanning
after five seconds; you may change it, however, to resume
only after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page
125.
QUICK POINT:
If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit
the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys from initiating scanning, you may disable scanning control from the microphone using Menu item “044 GENE MIC SCN” (set it to
DISABLE
“DISABLE
DISABLE”).
Page 107
VFO AND MEMORY SCANNING
MEMORY SCAN
1. Set the transceiver up in the memory mode by pressing
the [V/M] button briefly, if necessary.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SQL] knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
3. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN]
key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified
direction.
4. The scanner will now cause the transceiver to increment in the chosen direction until a signal is detected.
When a signal is encountered which opens the squelch,
the transceiver pauses on the signal and stays locked
on its frequency for five seconds. Thereafter, scanning
will resume whether or not the other station’s transmission has ended. While the transceiver is in the
“pause” condition, the decimal points in the frequency
display area will blink.
5. If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume.
6. To cancel the scanning, press the microphone’s [UP]
or [DWN] key briefly.
ADVICE:
 During Memory Group operation, only the channels
within the current Memory Group will be scanned.
 If the scan has paused on a signal, pressing the
microphone’s [UP] or [DWN] key will cause scanning
to resume instantly.
 If you press the microphone’s PTT switch during scanning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT
switch during scanning will not cause transmission,
however.
 You may select the manner in which the scanner resumes while it has paused on a signal, using Menu item
TIME
“045 GENE SCN RSM”. The default “TIME
TIME” setting
will cause the scanner to resume scanning after five
seconds; you may change it, however, to resume only
after the carrier has dropped out, if you like See page
125.
Page 108
[V/M] Button
QUICK POINT:
If you have no interest in scanning, and wish to prohibit
the microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys from initiating scanning, you may disable scanning control from the microphone using Menu item “044 GENE MIC SCN” (set it to
DISABLE
“DISABLE
DISABLE”).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
PMS (PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY SCANNING)
To limit scanning (and manual tuning) within a particular frequency range, you can use the Programmable Memory ScanP1L
P1U
P9L
P9U
ning (PMS) feature, which utilizes nine special-purpose memory pairs (“P1L
P1L/P1U
P1U” through “P9L
P9L/P9U
P9U”). The PMS feature is especially useful in helping you to observe any operating sub-band limits which apply to your Amateur license class.
1. Store the Lower and Upper tuning/scanning limit freP1L
P1U
quencies into the memory pair “P1L
P1L” and “P1U
P1U,” respectively, or any other “L/U” pair of memories in the
special PMS memory area. See page 102 for details
regarding memory storage.
2. Press the [V/M] button briefly, to enter the Memory
mode.
3. Press and hold the [BAND/MCH] button for two seconds. The [BAND/MCH] button will glow yellow, indicating that you may select a memory channel using
the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
4. Rotate the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob to select memory
P1L
P1U
channel “P1L
P1L” or “P1U
P1U.”
(
)[
5. Rotate the VFO-A SQL] knob so that the background
noise is just silenced.
6. Turn the Main Tuning Dial knob slightly (to activate
memory tuning). Tuning and scanning are now limited
P1U limits until you press
to the range within the P1L
P1L/P1U
the [V/M] button briefly, to return to memory channel
or VFO-A operation.
7. Press and hold in the microphone’s [UP] or [DWN]
key for 1/2 second to start scanning in the specified
direction.
8. The scanner will now cause the transceiver to increment in the chosen direction until a signal is detected.
When a signal is encountered which opens the squelch,
it will do different things, depending on the operating
mode:
 In the SSB/CW modes, the decimal points in the
frequency display area will blink and the scanner
will slow down (but does not stop).
 In the FM/AM modes, the transceiver pauses on
the signal and stays locked on its frequency for five
seconds. Thereafter, scanning will resume whether
or not the other station’s transmission has ended.
While the transceiver is in the “pause” condition,
the decimal points in the frequency display area
will blink. If the incoming signal disappears, scanning will resume.
9. If you rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob in the opposite direction from the current scanning direction (in
other words, you rotate the dial to the left when scanning toward a higher frequency), the direction of the
scan will reverse.
10. If you press the microphone PTT switch during scanning, the scanner will halt at once. Pressing the PTT
switch during scanning will not cause transmission,
however.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
[BAND/MCH] Button
[V/M] Button
[CLAR(VFO-B)] Knob
Page 109
PACKET OPERATION
Packet operation is easily accomplished on the FTDX5000 by connecting your TNC (Terminal Node Controller) to the
transceiver, as in the illustration. “Packet” operation also applies to SSB-based AFSK data modes, such as PSK31, etc.
DATA
OUT
PTT
PACKET
②
④ ⑤
① ③
PACKET JACK
DATA
IN
TNC
Pin 1 (DATA IN)
Pin 2 (GND)
Pin 3 (PACKET PTT)
Pin 4 (DATA OUT)
Pin 5 (BUSY)
DATA OUT
GND
PTT
DATA IN
(SQL Control)
PACKET SETUP (INCLUDING SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY)
Before operation can commence, some basic setup procedures must be performed, using
the Menu, to configure your radio for the desired data mode.
069
070
071
072
073
074
MENU ITEM
DATA DATA IN
DATA DT GAIN
DATA DT OUT
DATA OUT LVL
DATA VOX DLY
DATA VOX GAIN
AVAILABLE VALUES
DATA or PC
0 ~ 100
VFO-A or VFO-B
0 ~ 100
30 ~ 3000 ms
0 ~ 100
083
084
085
086
087
088
MENU
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
ITEM
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
PKT DISP
PKT SFT
AVAILABLE VALUES
OFF/100 ~ 1000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
OFF/700 ~ 4000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
–3000 ~ +3000 Hz
–3000 ~ +3000 Hz
BASIC SETUP
1. Press the [PKT] button.
ADVICE:
 For HF operation, SSB-based data operation is generally used. One brief press of the [PKT] button
will engage packet operation in the “LSB” mode
(by default). Both the “
” and “
” icons
will appear in the display.
 To operate FM-based 1200-baud packet on the 29/
50 MHz bands, press the [PKT] button repeatedly
” and “
” icons, to ento illuminate the “
gage the “PKT-FM” mode.
 To engaged Packet operation in the “USB” mode,
repeat pressing the [PKT] button until both the
“
” and “
” icons are appear.
2. When the “transmit” command is received from the
TNC, the FTDX5000 transmitter will automatically be
engaged. Likewise, the command to return to receive
will cause the radio to revert to the receive mode.
Page 110
ADVICE:
 If you need to adjust the output level from the “DATA
OUT” pin of the PACKET jack (pin 4) on the radio,
use Menu item “072 DATA OUT LVL”. For the input
level from the TNC, as applied to the DATA IN pin of
the PACKET jack (pin 1), use Menu item “070 DATA
DT GAIN”.
 During Packet operation via the rear panel PACKET
jack, the front panel MIC jack is cut off, so you won’t
have a “live microphone” problem during data operation.
NOTE:
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than
a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR]
knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/3 ~ 1/2 of its
normal maximum.
QUICK POINT:
PACKET Jack Specifications
 DATA IN (Pin 1)
Input Level: 50 mVp-p
Input Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
 DATA OUT (Pin 4)
Output Level: 100 mVp-p max.
Output Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
RTTY (RADIO TELETYPE) OPERATION
Most RTTY operation today is accomplished using a TNC or other computer-based system that utilizes AFSK tones. As
such, the previous discussion on LSB-mode “Packet” operation will also apply for Baudot operation. RTTY operation
using a Terminal Unit (TU), or the “FSK” output from a TNC is discussed below. Also, see the illustration for details
regarding connection to your TU.
PTT
RTTY
FSK
OUT
FSK
IN
② ③
① ④
RTTY JACK
RTTY Machine
Pin 1 (SHIFT )
Pin 2 (RX OUT)
Pin 3 (PTT)
Pin 4 (GND)
FSK OUT
AF IN
PTT
GND
SETTING UP FOR RTTY OPERATION
Before commencing RTTY operation, please direct your attention to the setup steps shown in
the chart to the right.
089
090
091
092
093
MENU ITEM
RTTY LCUT FRQ
RTTY LCUT SLP
RTTY HCUT FRQ
RTTY HCUT SLP
RTTY R PLRTY
AVAILABLE VALUES
OFF/100 ~ 1000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
OFF/700 ~ 4000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
NOR or REV
094
095
096
097
098
MENU ITEM
AVAILABLE VALUES
RTTY T PLRTY
NOR or REV
RTTY RTTY OUT
VFO-A or VFO-B
RTTY OUT LEVEL
0 ~ 100
RTTY SHIFT
170/200/425/850 Hz
RTTY TONE
1275/2125 Hz
BASIC SETUP
1. Press the [RTTY] button briefly, to enter the RTTY
mode.
One press of the [RTTY] button will engage RTTY
operation using “LSB” injection, which is generally
used in the Amateur service. In this mode, both the
“
” and “
” icons will appear in the display.
To switch to USB-side injection in RTTY, press the
[RTTY] button once more. Both the “
” and
[
“
” icons appear. Repeatedly pressing the RTTY]
button will toggle between LSB and USB injection on
RTTY.
2. When you begin typing on your TU or computer keyboard, the command to transmit should automatically
be sent to the transceiver, causing it to enter the transmit mode.
ADVICE:
 The Mark/Space Shift utilized in most Amateur RTTY
operation is 170 Hz. Other shifts may be configured
using Menu item “097 RTTY SHIFT”.
The FTDX5000 is set up for “high tone” operation (centered on 2125 Hz) by default, but you may configure it
for low tone (1275 Hz) operation using Menu item “098
RTTY TONE”.
 You may find that you are unable to decode some RTTY
stations, even if they are of sufficient signal strength.
If this is observed, there may be a Mark/Space polarity
problem between your station and the other station. If
so, try setting Menu item “093 RTTY R PLRTY” to
REV
“REV
REV” (“Reverse”) to see if that permits copy. A separate Menu item permits reversal of your transmitter
Mark/Space polarity: “094 RTTY T PLRTY”.
NOTE:
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than
a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR]
knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/2 ~ 1/3 of its
normal maximum.
QUICK POINT:
In the FTDX5000, “RTTY” is defined as an “FSK” mode,
whereby the closing and opening of a keying line (to
ground) causes the Mark/Space tones to alternate. The
RTTY mode is not an AFSK based mode in this transceiver and the AFSK output tones from a TNC will not
cause Mark/Space shifting to occur. Use the “Packet” mode
for AFSK-based Baudot and other data modes.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 111
PSK OPERATION
PSK operation is easily accomplished on the FTDX5000 by connecting your TNC (Terminal Node Controller) to the
transceiver, as in the illustration.
DATA
OUT
PTT
PACKET
②
④ ⑤
① ③
PACKET JACK
DATA
IN
TNC
Pin 1 (DATA IN)
Pin 2 (GND)
Pin 3 (PACKET PTT)
Pin 4 (DATA OUT)
Pin 5 (BUSY)
DATA OUT
GND
PTT
DATA IN
(SQL Control)
PSK SETUP (INCLUDING SUBCARRIER FREQUENCY)
Before operation can commence, some basic setup procedures must be performed, using
the Menu, to configure your radio for the desired data mode.
069
070
071
072
073
074
MENU ITEM
DATA DATA IN
DATA DT GAIN
DATA DT OUT
DATA OUT LVL
DATA VOX DLY
DATA VOX GAIN
AVAILABLE VALUES
DATA or PC
0 ~ 100
VFO-A or VFO-B
0 ~ 100
30 ~ 3000 ms
0 ~ 100
083
084
085
086
087
088
MENU
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
ITEM
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
PKT DISP
PKT SFT
AVAILABLE VALUES
OFF/100 ~ 1000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
OFF/700 ~ 4000 Hz
18dB/oct or 6dB/oct
–3000 ~ +3000 Hz
–3000 ~ +3000 Hz
BASIC SETUP
1. Press the [V/M] button once, if necessary, to enter the
“Memory” mode (the “
” icon will appear on the
display.
2. Press and hold in the [BAND/MCH] button for two
seconds. The button will glow yellow to signify that
rotation of the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob will allow selection of the memory channel.
US-1
US-5
3. Memory channels “US-1
US-1” through “US-5
US-5” are pre-programmed at the factory. The permitted frequencies in
the 5 MHz band, and the USB mode, are automatically selected on these channels.
4. When the “transmit” command is received from the
TNC, the FTDX5000 transmitter will be engaged. The
microphone input is disabled automatically when transmitting the PSK signal.
Likewise, the TNC “receive” command will cause the
radio to revert to the receive mode.
ADVICE:
 If you need to adjust the output level from the “DATA
OUT” pin of the PACKET jack (pin 4) on the radio,
use Menu item “072 DATA OUT LVL”. To adjust the
level of the signal from the TNC applied to the DATA
IN (pin 1) of the PACKET jack, use Menu item “070
DATA DT GAIN”.
Page 112
 During PSK operation via the rear panel PACKET
jack, the front panel MIC jack is cut off, so you won’t
have a “live microphone” problem during data operation.
 Set the PSK sub carrier frequency of the TNC to 1.5
kHz.
NOTE:
If you anticipate making data transmissions of longer than
a few minutes, we recommend that you use the [RF PWR]
knob to reduce the transmitter power to 1/3 ~ 1/2 of its
normal maximum.
QUICK POINT:
PACKET Jack Specifications
 DATA IN (Pin 1)
Input Level: 50 mVp-p
Input Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
 DATA OUT (Pin 4)
Output Level: 100 mVp-p max.
Output Impedance: 10 k-Ohms
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MISCELLANEOUS AFSK-BASED DATA MODES
The FTDX5000 may also be used for a host of other SSB-based Data modes. Please set up your system using the illustration
as a guideline.
LINE IN or MIC IN
LINE OUT or MIC OUT
COM PORT
PACKET
②
④ ⑤
① ③
PACKET JACK
Pin 1 (DATA IN)
Pin 2 (GND)
Pin 3 (PACKET PTT)
Pin 4 (DATA OUT)
Pin 5 (BUSY)
Interface
DATA OUT
GND
PACKET PTT
DATA IN
Interface
QUICK POINT:
When you have configured Menu item “175 TGEN VOX
DATA
SEL” to “DATA
DATA”, the transceiver will operate in a “VOX”
mode, and it is not necessary to connect a PTT line. This
makes very convenient to interface your transceiver to computer Sound Cards, etc.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 113
ABOUT THE TRANSVERTER OUTPUT TERMINAL
You may connect an after-market transverter to the rear panel TRV jack. The output frequency is selectable from 14, 28,
and 50 MHz, and the output level is approximately –10 dBm (0.1 mW) at 50 Ohms.
SETUP
1. Press the [MENU] button briefly to enter the Menu
mode.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “151 TUNE MY BAND”.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to select the desired input frequency band of the transverter in menu
T14M OFF
item (T14M
OFF, T28M OFF
OFF, or T50M OFF ).
4. Press the [ENT] button (one of the [BAND] buttons)
OFF
to change the parameter to “ON” (the “OFF
OFF” notation
ON
will change to “ON
ON”).
5. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT] knob to select Menu
item “173 TGEN ETX-GND”.
6. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to set this Menu
ENABLE
item to “ENABLE
ENABLE” to enable the internal relay connected to the rear panel TX GND jack.
7. Press and hold the [MENU] button for at least two seconds to save the new setting, and exit to normal operation.
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[ENT] Button
[MENU] Button
Page 114
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Setting the Transverter Frequency Offset
You may set up the frequency display so that it shows the
frequencies of the transverter operating band (instead of
the 28 MHz band frequencies used as the “IF” on your
FTDX5000).
Example: Setting up the FTDX5000 display for use with a
144 MHz Transverter
1. Connect the 144 MHz transverter to the FTDX5000.
2. Press the [MENU] button briefly, to enter the Menu
mode.
3. Rotate the (VFO-A)[SELECT ] knob to select the
Menu item which designates the input frequency band
from the transverter (040 GENE TRV 14M, 041
GENE TRV 28M, or 042 GENE TRV 50M).
4. Rotate the ( VFO-B )[ SELECT ] knob to select
44MHz
“44MHz
44MHz” on the display.
5. Press and hold the [MENU] button in for at least two
seconds to save the new setting and exit.
The “100 MHz” digit of the frequency is not displayed,
so when you are operating on 2 meters and see “45
MHz” on the frequency readout, this indicates “145
MHz” instead.
ADVICE:
With the setup described above, tuning the actual operating range of the FTDX5000 will correspond to transverter
operating frequency of 144-145 MHz, with “44-45” being
displayed on the front panel of the transceiver.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
ABOUT THE TRANSVERTER OUTPUT TERMINAL
OPERATION
ADVICE:
When the “Transverter” mode is turned on, TX power output will not be allowed to pass to the “ANT 1” through
“ANT 4” main antenna jacks. So one of these may be connected to your transverters “RX” jack. Just be certain to
disconnect the transverter when returning to HF operation, as the selected antenna jack will now be capable of
passing RF power.
VHF/UHF Antenna
1. Set up the FTDX5000 for transverter use, as described
previously.
2. Choose the “Transverter” band with the “MY Bands”
procedures as described on page 46. You may find the
“Transverter” band between the “1.8 MHz” and “50
MHz” Bands.
3. Rotate the Main Tuning Dial knob to set the desired
operating frequency. Operation is basically unchanged
from normal transceiver operation.
Transceiver
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
RF IN
TX GND
TRV
TX GND
V/U ANT
Page 115
MENU MODE
The Menu system of the FTDX5000 provides extensive customization capability, so you can set up your transceiver just the
001 AGC
way you want to operate it. The Menu items are grouped by general utilization category, and are numbered from “001
FST DLY
177 TGEN EMRGNCY
DLY” to “177
EMRGNCY.”
USING THE MENU
1. Press the [MENU] button momentarily, to engage the
Menu mode.
The SUB DISPLAY-I window will show the Menu
Number and Menu Group name, while the SUB DISPLAY-II window will show the Menu item; the SUB
DISPLAY-III window shows the current setting of the
currently-selected Menu item.
2. Rotate the (VFO-A )[SELECT ] knob to select the
Menu item you wish to work on.
3. Rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob to change the current setting of the selected Menu item.
ADVICE:
Press the [CLEAR] button momentarily to reset the
selected Menu item to the factory default value.
4. When you have finished making your adjustments,
press and hold in the [MENU] button for two seconds
to save the new setting and exit to normal operation. If
you only momentarily press the [MENU] button, the
new settings will not be retained.
[CLEAR] Button
(VFO-A)[SELECT] Knob
[MENU] Button
(VFO-B)[SELECT] Knob
Menu Mode Reset
You may reset all the Menu settings to their original factory defaults, if desired.
1. Turn the front panel [POWER] switch off.
2. Press and hold in the [MENU] button, and while holding it in, press the [POWER] switch to turn the transceiver
back on. Now release the [MENU] button.
Page 116
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
NO.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
GROUP
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
AGC
DISP
MENU FUNCTION
FST DLY
FST HLD
MID DLY
MID HLD
SLW DLY
SLW HLD
COLOR1
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DISP
DVS
DVS
KEY
DIM MTR
DIM VFD
DIM OEL
DIM ELCD
BAR SEL
S PK HLD
RTR STU
RTR ADJ
QMB MKR1
LVL IND
INDI
SELECT
RX LVL
TX LVL
BEACON
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
GENE
A3E
A3E
A3E
A3E
A3E
NUM STL
CONTEST
CW MEM1
CW MEM2
CW MEM3
CW MEM4
CW MEM5
ANT SEL
BEEP LVL
CAT BPS
CAT TOT
CAT RTS
CAT IND
MEM GRP
Q SPLIT
TRACK
TX TOT
TRV 14M
TRV 28M
TRV 50M
T DIAL2
MIC SCN
SCAN RSM
FREQ ADJ
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
MIC GAIN
AVAILABLE VALUES
20ms ~ 4000ms (msec) (20msec step)
0ms ~ 2000ms (msec) (20msec step)
20ms ~ 4000ms (msec) (20msec step)
0ms ~ 2000ms (msec) (20msec step)
20ms ~ 4000ms (msec) (20msec step)
0ms ~ 2000ms (msec) (20msec step)
BLUE1(COOL BLUE) / BLUE2(CONTRAST BLUE) /
WHITE(FLASH WHITE) / UMBER1(CONTRAST UMBER) /
UMBER2(UMBER)
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 15
0 ~ 15
CLAR / CW TUNE
OFF / 0.5s / 1.0s / 2.0s (sec)
0° /90° / 180° / 270°
0° ~ -30° (-2° step)
DISABLE/ENABLE
PTCH / SPED / CDLY / VDLY / RPWR /MICG / PROC
VFD /OEL
PTN1 / PTN2 / PTN3
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 100
OFF/1s~240s (sec) (1sec step)
270s~690s (sec) (30sec step)
1290 / AUNO / AUNT / A2NO / A2NT / 12NO / 12NT
0 ~ 9999
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
TEXT / MESSAGE
BAND / STACK
0 ~ 100
4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps / 38400bps
10ms / 100ms / 1000ms / 3000ms (msec)
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
-20kHz ~ 0kHz ~ 20kHz (1 kHz step)
OFF / BAND / FREQ
OFF / 1min ~ 30min
30MHz ~ 46MHz
30MHz ~ 46MHz
30MHz ~ 46MHz
STEP-2 / STEP-1 / OFF
DISABLE / ENABLE
PAUSE / TIME
-25 ~ 0 ~ +25
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
MCVR / 0 ~ 100
DEFAULT SETTING
300ms
20ms
700ms
20ms
3000ms
20ms
BLUE1
(COOL BLUE)
8
8
8
8
CW TUNE
OFF
0°
0°
ENABLE
PTCH
VFD
PTN2
50
50
OFF
1290
1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BAND
40
4800bps
10ms
ENABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
5kHz
OFF
OFF
44MHz
44MHz
44MHz
STEP-1
ENABLE
TIME
0
OFF
6dB/oct
OFF
6dB/oct
30
1: Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.
2: Requires optional RF μTuning Kit.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 117
MENU MODE
NO.
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
GROUP
A3E
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
A1A
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
F3E
F3E
F3E
F3E
F3E
F3E
F3E
F3E
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
PKT
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
RTTY
A3J
A3J
A3J
A3J
A3J
A3J
105 A3J
Page 118
MENU FUNCTION
MIC SEL
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
F-TYPE
F-REV
R-TYPE
R-REV
CW AUTO
BFO
BK-IN
SHAPE
WEIGHT
FRQ DISP
PC KYNG
QSK TIME
DATA IN
DT GAIN
DT OUT
OUT LVL
VOX DLY
VOX GAIN
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
MIC GAIN
MIC SEL
28 RPT
50 RPT
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
PKT DISP
PKT SFT
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SLP
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SLP
R PLRTY
T PLRTY
RTTY OUT
OUT LVL
SHIFT
TONE
LCUT FRQ
LCUT SPL
HCUT FRQ
HCUT SPL
MIC SEL
TX BPF
LSB CAR
AVAILABLE VALUES
FRONT / DATA / PC
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
NOR / REV
OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
NOR / REV
OFF / 50M / ON
USB / LSB / AUTO
SEMI / FULL
1ms / 2ms / 4ms / 6ms (msec)
2.5 ~ 4.5
FREQ / PITCH
DISABLE / ENABLE
15ms / 20ms / 25ms / 30ms (msec)
DATA / PC
0 ~ 100
VFO-A / VFO-B
0 ~ 100
30ms ~ 3000ms (10msec step)
0 ~ 100
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
MCVR / 0 ~ 100
FRONT / DATA / PC
0kHz ~ 1000kHz (10kHz step)
0kHz ~ 4000kHz (10kHz step)
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
-3000 ~ +3000Hz (10 Hz step)
-3000 ~ +3000Hz (10 Hz step)
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
NOR / REV
NOR / REV
VFO-A / VFO-B
0 ~ 100
170Hz / 200Hz / 425Hz / 850Hz
1275Hz / 2125Hz
OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
700Hz ~ 4000Hz / OFF (50Hz step)
6dB/oct / 18dB/oct
FRONT / DATA / PC
50-3000 / 100-2900 / 200-2800 /300-2700 /400-2600 /
3000WB
-200Hz ~ 200Hz (10Hz step)
DEFAULT SETTING
FRONT
300
18dB/oct
1000
6dB/oct
ELEKEY
NOR
ELEKEY
NOR
OFF
USB
SEMI
4ms
3.0
PITCH
DISABLE
15ms
DATA
50
VFO-A
50
300ms
50
250Hz
18dB/oct
OFF
6dB/oct
50
FRONT
100kHz
1000kHz
300Hz
18dB/oct
3000Hz
18dB/oct
0Hz
1000Hz
300Hz
18dB/oct
3000Hz
18dB/oct
NOR
NOR
VFO-A
50
170Hz
2125Hz
100Hz
6dB/oct
3000Hz
6dB/oct
FRONT
300-2700
0Hz
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
NO.
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
GROUP
A3J
ROUT
ROUT
RGEN
RGEN
RGEN
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
RDSP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
SCP
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TUN
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
MENU FUNCTION
USB CAR
AGC SLP
HEADPHN
IF OUT
MNB LVL
MNB WDTH
APF WDTH
CNTR LV
CNTR WI
NOTCH WI
HCW SHP
HCW SLP
HPKT SHP
HPKT SLP
HRTY SHP
HRTY SLP
HSSB SHP
HSSB SLP
VCW SHP
VCW SLP
VPKT SHP
VPKT SLP
VRTY SHP
VRTY SLP
VSSB SHP
VSSB SLP
1.8 FIX1
3.5 FIX1
5.0 FIX1
7.0 FIX1
10.1 FIX1
14.0 FIX1
18.0 FIX1
21.0 FIX1
24.8 FIX1
28.0 FIX1
50.0 FIX1
DIAL STP
CW FINE
MHz SEL
AM STEP
FM STEP
AM D.LCK
FM D.LCK
FM DIAL
MY BAND
EQ1 FRQ
EQ1 LVL
EQ1 BW
EQ2 FRQ
EQ2 LVL
EQ2 BW
EQ3 FRQ
EQ3 LVL
AVAILABLE VALUES
-200Hz ~ 200Hz (10Hz step)
NORMAL / SLOPE
SEPARATE / COMBINE1 / COMBINE2
DISABLE / ENABLE
0 ~ 100
0 ~ 100
S.NARROW / NARROW / MEDIUM / WIDE
-40dB ~ 20dB
1 ~ 11
NARROW / WIDE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
SOFT / SHARP
STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
1800kHz ~ 1999kHz (1kHz step)
3500kHz ~ 3999kHz (1kHz step)
5250kHz ~ 5499kHz (1kHz step)
7000kHz ~ 7299kHz (1kHz step)
10100kHz ~ 10149kHz (1kHz step)
14000kHz ~ 14349kHz (1kHz step)
18000kHz ~ 18199kHz (1kHz step)
21000kHz ~ 21449kHz (1kHz step)
24800kHz ~ 24989kHz (1kHz step)
28000kHz ~ 29699kHz (1kHz step)
50000kHz ~ 53999kHz (1kHz step)
1Hz / 5Hz / 10Hz
DISABLE / ENABLE
1MHz / 100kHz
2.5kHz / 5kHz / 9kHz / 10kHz /12.5kHz
5kHz / 6.25kHz / 10kHz / 12.5kHz / 20kHz / 25kHz
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
10Hz / 100Hz
1.8M ~ 50M / GEN / T14M / T28M / T50M
OFF / 100Hz ~ 700Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 700Hz ~ 1500Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 1500Hz ~ 3200Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
DEFAULT SETTING
0Hz
NORMAL
SEPARATE
DISABLE
50
50
MEDIUM
-15dB
10
WIDE
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
SHARP
MEDIUM
1800kHz
3500kHz
5250kHz
7000kHz
10100kHz
14000kHz
18068kHz
21000kHz
24890kHz
28000kHz
50000kHz
10Hz
DISABLE
100kHz
5kHz
5kHz
DISABLE
DISABLE
100Hz
---OFF
5
10
OFF
5
10
OFF
5
1: Requires optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 119
MENU MODE
NO.
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
GROUP
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TAUD
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
TGEN
Page 120
MENU FUNCTION
EQ3 BW
PE1 FRQ
PE1 LVL
PE1 BW
PE2 FRQ
PE2 LVL
PE2 BW
PE3 FRQ
PE3 LVL
PE3 BW
BIAS
MAX PWR
PWR CTRL
ETX-GND
TUN PWR
VOX SEL
ANTI VOX
EMRGNCY
AVAILABLE VALUES
1 ~ 10
OFF / 100Hz ~ 700Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 700Hz ~ 1500Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
OFF / 1500Hz ~ 3200Hz (100 Hz step)
-20 ~ 10
1 ~ 10
1 ~ 100
20W / 50W / 100W / 200W
ALL MODE / CARRIER
DISABLE / ENABLE
20W / 50W / 100W / 200W
MIC / DATA
0 ~ 100
DISABLE / ENABLE
DEFAULT SETTING
10
200Hz
0
2
800Hz
0
1
2100Hz
0
1
100
200W
ALL MODE
DISABLE
100W
MIC
50
DISABLE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
AGC GROUP
DISPLAY GROUP
001 AGC FST DLY
007 DISP COLOR
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC FAST mode.
Available Values: 20 msec ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 300 msec
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for
the AGC FAST mode.
Available Values: 0 msec ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 20 msec
Function: Selects the Display color when the optional Data
Management Unit (DMU-2000) is connected.
Available Values: BLUE1 (COOL BLUE) / BLUE2
(CONTRAST BLUE) / WHITE (FLASH WHITE) /
UMBER1 (CONTRAST UMBER) / UMBER2 (UMBER)
Default Setting: BLUE1 (COLL BLUE)
ADVICE:
If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
003 AGC MID DLY
008 DISP DIM MTR
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC MID mode.
Available Values: 20 msec ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 700 msec
Function: Setting of the meter brightness level when
“DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 8
ADVICE:
You may see the effects of your changes by pressing the
[DIM] switch to activate the Dimmer function.
002 AGC FST HLD
004 AGC MID HLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for
the AGC MID mode.
Available Values: 0 msec ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 20 msec
005 AG SLW DLY
Function: Sets the delay time for the AGC SLOW mode.
Available Values: 20 msec ~ 4000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 3000 msec
006 AGC SLW HLD
Function: Sets the hang time of the AGC peak voltage for
the AGC SLOW mode.
Available Values: 0 msec ~ 2000 msec (20 msec/step)
Default Setting: 20 msec
009 DISP DIM VFD
Function: Setting of the frequency display brightness level
when “DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 8
ADVICE:
You may see the effects of your changes by pressing the
[DIM] switch to activate the Dimmer function.
010 DISP DIM OEL
Function: Setting of three Sub Displays brightness level
when “DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 8
ADVICE:
You may see the effects of your changes by pressing the
[DIM] switch to activate the Dimmer function.
011 DISP DIM ELCD
Function: Setting of the Spectrum Scope display brightness level of the optional SM-5000 Station Monitor when
“DIM” is selected.
Available Values: 0 ~ 15
Default Setting: 8
ADVICE:
 You may see the effects of your changes by pressing
the [DIM] switch to activate the Dimmer function.
 If the optional SM-5000 Station Monitor is not connected, this adjustment has no effect.
012 DISP BAR SEL
Function: Selects one of three parameters to be viewed
on the Tuning Offset Indicator.
Available Values: CLAR / CW TUNE
Default Setting: CW TUNE
CLAR:
Displays relative clarifier offset.
CW TUNE: Displays relative CW tuning offset between the incoming signal and transmitted frequency.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 121
MENU MODE
DISPLAY GROUP
013 DISP S PK HLD
019 DISP SELECT
Function: Selects the peak hold time of the VFO-B
receiver’s S-meter.
Available Values: OFF / 0.5s / 1.0s / 2.0s
Default Setting: OFF
Function: Selects the display pattern of the SUB DISPLAY-II and SUB DISPLAY-III windows.
Available Values: PTN1 / PTN2 / PTN3
Default Setting: PTN2
PTN1: Generally, the current value is not indicated in
the window, only the graphic is depicted. When
the [SELECT] knob is rotated, the current
value will appear under the graphical display.
Three seconds after the turning of the [SELECT] knob is stopped, the current value indication disappears.
PTN2: Generally, the current value is indicated with
the small characters and graphical display.
When the [SELECT] knob is rotated, the current value indication becomes large characters.
Three seconds after the turning of the [SELECT] knob is stopped, the current value indication returns to small characters.
PTN3: The current value always indicated with the
large characters and graphical display.
014 DISP RTR STU
Function: Selects the starting point of your rotator
controller’s indicator needle.
Available Values: 0° / 90° / 180° / 270°
Default Setting: 0°
015 DISP RTR ADJ
Function: Adjusts the indicator needle precisely to the
starting point set in menu item “014 DISP RTR STU”.
Available Values: –30° ~ 0° (2°/step)
Default Setting: 0°
016 DISP QMB MKR
Function: Enables/Disables the QMB Marker (White arrow “”) to display on the Spectrum Band Scope when
the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is connected.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: ENABLE
ADVICE:
If the optional DMU-2000 Data Management Unit is not
connected, this adjustment has no effect.
017 DISP LVL IND
Function: Enables/Disables the Main Display to show the
frequency or value while each enabled knob is turned.
Available Values: PTCH (PITCH) / SPED (SPEED) /
CDLY (CW DELAY) / VDLY (VOX DEALAY) / RPWR
(RF POWER) / MICG (MIC GAIN) / PROC (PROCESSOR GAIN)
To disable the “function,” rotate the (VFO-B)[SELECT]
knob to recall the “function” to be disabled, then press the
[ENT] key (one of the [BAND] buttons) to change this
setting to “OFF”. Repeat the same procedures to enable a
function (setting it to “ON”).
018 DISP INDI
Function: Select the indicator location of the current value
when adjusting the following knobs.
Available Values: VFD / OEL
Default Setting: VFD
VFD: The current value will show for 3-seconds in the
lower right corner of the Main Display whenever the following knob is turned.
OEL: The current value will show for 3-seconds in the
SUB DISPLAY-III window whenever the following knob is turned.
: MIC, RF PWR, SPEED, PITCH, DELAY, and
PITCH knob
Page 122
SUB DISPLAY EXAMPLES (CONTOUR OPERATION)
GENERAL
WHILE ADJUSTING
PTN1
PTN2
PTN3
DVS GROUP
020 DVS RX LVL
Function: Sets the audio output level from the voice
memory.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default: 50
021 DVS TX LVL
Function: Sets the microphone input level to the voice
memory
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default: 50
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
KEYER GROUP
022 KEY BEACON
026 KEY CW MEM2
Function: Sets the interval time between repeats of the
beacon message.
Available Values: OFF / 1s ~ 240 sec (1 sec/step) /
270s ~ 690 sec (30 sec/step)
Default Setting: OFF
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
register 2.
Available Values: TEXT / MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from the
FH-2’s keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
023 KEY NUM STL
Function: Selects the Contest Number “Cut” format for
an imbedded contest number.
Available Values: 1290 / AUNO / AUNT / A2NO / A2NT
/12NO / 12NT
Default Setting: 1290
1290: Does not abbreviate the Contest Number
AUNO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
“N” for “Nine,” and “O” for “Zero.”
AUNT: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “U” for “Two,”
“N” for “Nine,” and “T” for “Zero.”
A2NO: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
and “O” for “Zero.”
A2NT: Abbreviates to “A” for “One,” “N” for “Nine,”
and “T” for “Zero.”
12NO: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “O” for
“Zero.”
12NT: Abbreviates to “N” for “Nine,” and “T” for
“Zero.”
024 KEY CONTEST
Function: Enters the initial contest number that will increment/decrement after sending during contest QSOs.
Available Values: 0 ~ 9999
Default Setting: 1
ADVICE:
Press the [CLEAR] button to reset the contest number to
“1.”
025 KEY CW MEM1
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
register 1.
Available Values: TEXT / MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from the
FH-2’s keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
027 KEY CW MEM3
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
register 3.
Available Values: TEXT / MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from the
FH-2’s keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
028 KEY CW MEM4
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
register 4.
Available Values: TEXT / MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from the
FH-2’s keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
029 KEY CW MEM5
Function: Permits entry of the CW message for message
register 5.
Available Values: TEXT / MESSAGE
Default Setting: MESSAGE
TEXT:
You may enter the CW message from the
FH-2’s keypad.
MESSAGE: You may enter the CW message from the
CW keyer.
Page 123
MENU MODE
GENERAL GROUP
030 GENE ANT SEL
038 GENE TRACK
Function: Sets the method of antenna selection.
Available Values: BAND / STACK
Default Setting: BAND
BAND: The antenna is selected in accordance with
the operating band.
STACK: The antenna is selected in accordance with
the band stack (different antennas may be utilized on the same band, if so selected in the
band stack).
Function: Sets the VFO Tracking feature.
Available Values: OFF / BAND / FREQ
Default Setting: OFF
OFF: Disables the VFO Tracking feature.
BAND: When you change bands on the VFO-A side,
the VFO-B will automatically change to be
the same as that of VFO-A.
FREQ: This function is the similar to “BAND”, additionally, the VFO-B frequency changes together with the VFO-A frequency when turning the Main Dial Tuning knob.
031 GENE BEEP LVL
Function: Sets the beep level.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 40
032 GENE CAT BPS
Function: Sets the transceiver’s computer-interface circuitry for the CAT baud rate to be used.
Available Values: 4800bps / 9600bps / 19200bps /
38400bps
Default Setting: 4800bps
033 GENE CAT TOT
Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time for a
CAT command input.
Available Values: 10ms / 100ms / 1000ms / 3000ms
Default Setting: 10ms
The Time-Out Timer shuts off the CAT data input after the
continuous transmission of the programmed time.
034 GENE CAT RTS
Function: Enables/Disables the RTS port of the CAT jack.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: ENABEL
035 GENE CAT IND
Function: Enables/Disables the flashing of the CAT LED
in conjunction with the CAT commands.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: ENABEL
036 GENE MEM GRP
Function: Enables/Disables Memory Group Operation.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABEL
037 GENE Q SPLIT
Function: Selects the tuning offset for the Quick Split feature.
Available Values: –20 kHz ~ 0 kHz ~ 20 kHz (1 kHz Step)
Default Setting: 5 kHz
Page 124
039 GENE TX TOT
Function: Sets the Time-Out Timer countdown time.
Available Values: OFF / 1min ~ 30min
Default Setting: OFF
The Time-Out Timer shuts off the transmitter after continuous transmission of the programmed time.
040 GENE TRV 14M
Function: Sets the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display
for operation with a transverter when the exciter band is
14 MHz.
Available Values: 30 MHz ~ 46 MHz
Default Setting: 44 MHz
The default setting would be used with a 144 MHz
transverter. If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the
radio, set this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are
hidden on this radio).
041 GENE TRV 28M
Function: Sets the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display
for operation with a transverter when the exciter band is
28 MHz.
Available Values: 30 MHz ~ 46 MHz
Default Setting: 44 MHz
The default setting would be used with a 144 MHz
transverter. If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the
radio, set this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are
hidden on this radio).
042 GENE TRV 50M
Function: Sets the 10’s and 1’s of the MHz digits display
for operation with a transverter when the exciter band is
50 MHz.
Available Values: 30 MHz ~ 46 MHz
Default Setting: 44 MHz
The default setting would be used with a 144 MHz
transverter. If you connect a 430 MHz transverter to the
radio, set this menu to “30” (the “100 MHz” digits are
hidden on this radio).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
GENERAL GROUP
MODE-AM GROUP
043 GENE μT DIAL
047 A3E LCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the μ-TUNE mode.
Available Values: STEP-1 / STEP-2 / OFF
Default Setting: STEP-1
STEP-1: Activates the μ-TUNE system using
“COARSE” steps of the [SELECT] knob (2
steps/click) on the 7 MHz and lower amateur
bands. On the 10/14 MHz bands, “FINE”
steps of [SELECT] knob (1 step/click) will
be used.
STEP-2: Activates the μ-TUNE system using “FINE”
steps of the [SELECT] knob (1 step/click)
on the 14 MHz and lower amateur bands on
the Main band (VFO-A).
OFF:
Disables the μ-TUNE system. Activates the
VRF feature on the 14 MHz and lower amateur bands on the main band (VFO-A).
ADVICE:
If the optional RF μTuning Kit is not connected, this adjustment has no effect.
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the AM mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100 Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
044 GENE MIC SCN
Function: Enables/disables scanning access via the
microphone’s [UP]/[DWN] keys.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: ENABLE
045 GENE SCN RSM
Function: Selects the Scan Resume mode.
Available Values: TIME / PAUSE
Default Setting: TIME
TIME: The scanner will hold for five seconds, then
resume whether or not the other station is still
transmitting.
PAUSE: The scanner will hold until the signal disappears, then will resume after one second.
046 GENE FRQ ADJ
Function: Adjusts the reference oscillator.
Available Values: –25 ~ 0 ~ 25
Default Setting: 0
Connect a 50-Ohm dummy load and frequency counter to
the antenna jack; adjust the (VFO-B)[SELECT] knob so
that the frequency counter reading is same as the VFO
frequency while pressing the PTT switch.
ADVICE:
Do not perform this Menu item unless you have a highperformance frequency counter. Perform this Menu item
after aging the transceiver and frequency counter sufficiently (at least 30 minutes).
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
048 A3E LCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the AM mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
049 A3E HCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the AM mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
050 A3E HCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the AM mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
051 A3E MIC GAIN
Function: Sets the microphone gain for the AM mode.
Available Values: MCVR / 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 30
When this menu is set to “MCVR”, you may adjust the
microphone gain using the front panel’s [MIC] knob.
052 A3E MIC SEL
Function: Selects the microphone to be used in the AM
mode.
Available Values: FRONT / DATA / PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the front
panel’s MIC jack while using the AM mode.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the PACKET Jack while using the AM mode.
PC:
This parameter is for future expansion of this
transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is
not supported.
Page 125
MENU MODE
MODE-CW GROUP
053 A1A LCUT FRQ
059 A1A R-TYPE
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the CW mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100 Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 300Hz
Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for
the device connected to the rear panel KEY jack.
Available Values: OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
Default Setting: ELEKEY
OFF:
Disables the rear panel keyer (use this mode
with a straight key, an external keyer, or a
computer-driven keying interface).
BUG:
Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs.”
ELEKEY: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) disabled.
ACS:
Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) enabled.
054 A1A LCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the CW mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
055 A1A HCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the CW mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 1000Hz
056 A1A HCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the CW mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
057 A1A F-TYPE
060 A1A R-REV
Function: Selects the keyer paddle wiring configuration
for the KEY jack on the rear panel.
Available Values: NOR / REV
Default Setting: NOR
NOR: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground
REV: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground
Function: Selects the desired keyer operation mode for
the device connected to the front panel KEY jack.
Available Values: OFF / BUG / ELEKEY / ACS
Default Setting: ELEKEY
OFF:
Disables the front panel keyer (use this
mode with a straight key, an external keyer,
or a computer-driven keying interface).
BUG:
Mechanical “bug” keyer emulation. One
paddle produces “dits” automatically, while
the other paddle manually produces “dahs.”
ELEKEY: Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) disabled.
ACS:
Iambic keyer with ACS (Automatic Character Spacing) enabled.
061 A1A CW AUTO
058 A1A F-REV
Function: Sets the CW carrier oscillator injection side for
the CW mode.
Available Values: USB / LSB / AUTO
Default Setting: USB
USB: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the USB
side.
LSB: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side.
AUTO: Injects the CW carrier oscillator on the LSB
side while operating on the 7 MHz band and
below, and the USB side while operating on
the 10 MHz band and up.
Function: Selects the keyer paddle’s wiring configuration
for the KEY jack on the front panel.
Available Values: NOR / REV
Default Setting: NOR
NOR: Tip = Dot, Ring = Dash, Shaft = Ground
REV: Tip = Dash, Ring = Dot, Shaft = Ground
Page 126
Function: Enables/disables CW keying while operating
on SSB.
Available Values: OFF / 50M / ON
Default Setting: OFF
OFF: Disables CW keying while operating on SSB.
50M: Enables CW keying only while operating SSB
on 50 MHz (but not HF).
ON: Enables CW keying while operating on SSB (all
TX bands).
NOTE:
This feature allows you to move someone from SSB to
CW without having to change modes on the front panel.
062 A1A BFO
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
MODE-CW GROUP
MODE-DAT GROUP
063 A1A BK-IN
069 DATA DATA IN
Function: Sets the CW “break-in” mode.
Available Values: SEMI / FULL
Default Setting: SEMI
SEMI: The transceiver will operate in the semi breakin mode. The delay (receiver recovery) time is
set by the front panel [DELAY] knob.
FULL: The transceiver will operate in the full breakin (QSK) mode.
Function: Selects the data input path to be used in the
PKT mode.
Available Values: DATA / PC
Default Setting: DATA
DATA: Uses the data input line connected to pin 1 of
the PACKET jack while using the PKT mode.
PC:
This parameter is for future expansion of this
transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is
not supported.
064 A1A SHAPE
Function: Selects the CW carrier wave-form shape (rise/
fall times).
Available Values: 1ms / 2ms / 4ms / 6ms
Default Setting: 4 ms
065 A1A WEIGHT
Function: Sets the Dot:Dash ratio for the built-in electronic keyer.
Available Values: (1:) 2.5 ~ 4.5
Default Setting: 3.0
066 A1A FRQ DISP
Function: Selects the frequency Display Format for the
CW mode.
Available Values: FREQ / PITCH
Default Setting: PITCH
FREQ: Displays the receiver carrier frequency, without any offset added. When changing modes
between SSB and CW, the frequency display
remains constant.
PITCH: This frequency display reflects the added
BFO offset.
067 A1A PC KYNG
Function: Enables/disables CW keying from the
“PACKET PTT” terminal (pin 3) on the rear panel’s
PACKET jack while operating in the CW mode.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
070 DATA DT GAIN
Function: Sets the data input level from the TNC to the
AFSK modulator.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
071 DATA DT OUT
Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data
output port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack.
Available Values: VFO-A / VFO-B
Default Setting: VFO-A
072 DATA OUT LVL
Function: Sets the AFSK data output level at the output
port (pin 4) of the PACKET jack.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
073 DATA VOX DLY
Function: Adjusts the “VOX” delay (receiver recovery)
time in the PKT mode.
Available Values: 30ms ~ 3000ms (10 ms/step)
Default Setting: 300ms
074 DATA VOX GAIN
Function: Adjusts the “VOX” gain in the PKT mode.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
068 A1A QSK TIME
Function: Selects the time delay between when the CW
key is closed and the carrier is transmitted during Semibreak-in operation.
Available Values: 15ms / 20ms / 25ms / 30 ms
Default Setting: 15ms
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 127
MENU MODE
MODE-FM GROUP
MODE-PKT GROUP
075 F3E LCUT FRQ
083 PKT LCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the FM mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 250Hz
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the Packet mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 300Hz
076 F3E LCUT SLP
084 PKT LCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the FM mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the Packet mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
077 F3E HCUT FRQ
085 PKT HCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the FM mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the Packet mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 3000Hz
078 F3E HCUT SLP
086 PKT HCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the FM mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the Packet mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
079 F3E MIC GAIN
087 PKT PKT DISP
Function: Sets the microphone gain for the FM mode.
Available Values: MCVR / 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
When this menu is set to “MCVR”, you may adjust the
microphone gain using the front panel [MIC] knob.
Function: Sets the packet frequency display offset.
Available: –3000Hz ~ 3000Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default: 0Hz
080 F3E MIC SEL
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the FM
mode.
Available Values: FRONT / DATA / PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the front
panel MIC jack while using the FM mode.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the PACKET Jack while using the FM mode.
PC:
This parameter is for future expansion of this
transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is
not supported.
088 DATA PKT SFT
Function: Sets the carrier point during the SSB packet
operation.
Available: –3000Hz ~ 3000Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default: 1000Hz (typical center frequency for PSK31, etc.)
081 F3E 28 RPT
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the
28 MHz band.
Available Values: 0kHz ~ 1000kHz (10 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 100kHz
082 F3E 50 RPT
Function: Sets the magnitude of the repeater shift on the
50 MHz band.
Available Values: 0kHz ~ 4000kHz (10 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 1000kHz
Page 128
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
MODE-RTY GROUP
MODE-SSB GROUP
089 RTTY LCUT FRQ
099 A3J LCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the RTTY mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 300Hz
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the lower side
of the RX audio filter in the SSB mode.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 1000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 100Hz
090 RTTY LCUT SLP
100 A3J LCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the RTTY mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
Function: Selects the filter slope of the lower side of the
RX audio filter in the SSB mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
091 RTTY HCUT FRQ
101 A3J HCUT FRQ
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the RTTY mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 3000Hz
Function: Selects the cutoff frequency of the upper side
of the RX audio filter in the SSB mode.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 4000Hz (50 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 3000Hz
092 RTTY HCUT SLP
102 A3J HCUT SLP
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the RTTY mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 18dB/oct
Function: Selects the filter slope of the upper side of the
RX audio filter in the SSB mode.
Available Values: 6dB/oct or 18dB/oct
Default Setting: 6dB/oct
093 RTTY R PLRTY
103 A3J MIC SEL
Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity
for RTTY receive operation.
Available Values: NOR / REV
Default Setting: NOR
Function: Selects the microphone to be used on the SSB
modes (LSB and USB).
Available Values: FRONT / DATA / PC
Default Setting: FRONT
FRONT: Selects the microphone connected to the front
panel MIC jack while using the SSB modes.
DATA: Selects the microphone connected to pin 1 of
the PACKET Jack while using the SSB
modes.
PC:
This parameter is for future expansion of this
transceiver’s capabilities, but at this time is
not supported.
094 RTTY T PLRTY
Function: Selects normal or reverse Mark/Space polarity
for RTTY transmit operation.
Available Values: NOR / REV
Default Setting: NOR
095 RTTY RTTY OUT
Function: Selects the receiver to be connected to the data
output port (pin 2) of the RTTY jack.
Available Values: VFO-A / VFO-B
Default Setting: VFO-A
096 RTTY OUT LVL
Function: Sets the FSK RTTY data output level at the
output port (pin 2) of the RTTY jack.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
097 RTTY SHIFT
Function: Selects the frequency shift for FSK RTTY operation.
Available Values:170Hz / 200Hz / 425Hz / 850Hz
Default Setting: 170Hz
104 A3J TX BPF
Function: Selects the audio passband of the DSP modulator on the SSB mode.
Available Values: 50-3000 / 100-2900 / 200-2800 /
300-2700 / 400-2600 / 3000WB
Default Setting: 300-2700 (Hz)
NOTE:
The apparent power output, when using the widest bandwidths, may seem lower. This is normal, and it occurs because the available transmitter power is distributed over a
wider bandwidth. The greatest compression of power output, conversely, occurs when using the “400-2600” setting (400-2600 Hz), and this setting is highly recommended
for contest or DX pile-up work.
098 RTTY TONE
Function: Selects the Mark tone for RTTY operation.
Available Values: 1275Hz / 2125Hz
Default Setting: 2125Hz
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 129
MENU MODE
MODE-SSB GROUP
RX GNRL GROUP
105 A3J LSB CAR
109 RGEN IF OUT
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the LSB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ 200 Hz (10 Hz/steps)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
Function: Enables/Disables the 9 MHz RX IF signal from
the rear panel IF OUT jack.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
106 A3J USB CAR
110 RGEN MNB LVL
Function: Adjusts the receiver carrier point for the USB
mode.
Available Values: –200 Hz ~ 200 Hz (10 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 0 Hz
Function: Adjusts the noise blanking level of the VFO-A
IF noise Blanker.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
111 RGEN MNB WDTH
RX AUDIO GROUP
107 ROUT AGC SLP
Function: Selects the gain curve of the AGC amplifier.
Available Values: NORMAL / SLOPE
Default Setting: NORMAL
NORMAL: The AGC output level will follow a linear response to the antenna input level,
while AGC is activated.
SLOPE:
The AGC output level will increase at 1/
10 the rate of the antenna input level,
while AGC is activated.
Function: Adjusts the bandwidth for the longer-duration
pulse noise of the VFO-A IF noise Blanker.
Available Values: 0 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
Audio Output
SLOPE
NORMAL
Input Signal
108 ROUT HEADPHN
Function: Selects one of three audio mixing modes when
using headphones during Dual Receive operation.
Available Values: SEPARATE / COMBINE1 /
COMBINE2
Default Setting: SEPARATE
SEPARATE:
Audio from the VFO-A receiver
is heard only in the left ear, and
VFO-B receiver audio solely in
the right ear.
COMBINE1:
Audio from both VFO-A and
VFO-B receivers can be heard
in both ears, but VFO-B audio
is attenuated in the left ear and
VFO-A audio is attenuated in
the right ear.
COMBINE2:
Audio from both VFO-A and
VFO-B receivers is combined
and heard equally in both ears.
Page 130
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
RX DSP GROUP
112 RDSP APF WDTH
120 RDSP HRTY SHP
Function: Selects the Bandwidth of the Audio Peak Filter.
Available Values: S.NARROW/NARROW/MEDIUM/WIDE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the RTTY mode on the HF band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
113 RDSP CNTR LV
Function: Adjusts the gain of the Contour filter.
Available Values: –40 ~ 20 dB
Default Setting: –15 dB
114 RDSP CNTR WI
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the Contour filter.
Available Values: 1 ~ 11
Default Setting: 10
115 RDSP NOTCH WI
Function: Selects the bandwidth of the DSP NOTCH filter
Available Values: NARROW / WIDE
Default Setting: WIDE
116 RDSP HCW SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the CW mode on the HF band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
117 RDSP HCW SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the CW mode on the HF band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
118 RDSP HPKT SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the PKT mode on the HF band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
119 RDSP HPKT SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the PKT mode on the HF band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
SHARP
121 RDSP HRTY SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the RTTY mode on the HF band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
122 RDSP HSSB SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the SSB mode on the HF band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
123 RDSP HSSB SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the SSB mode on the HF band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
124 RDSP VCW SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the CW mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
125 RDSP VCW SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the CW mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
SOFT
STEEP
MEDIUM
GENTLE
DSP FILTER SHAPE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
DSP FILTER PASSBAND
Page 131
MENU MODE
RX DSP GROUP
126 RDSP VPKT SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the PKT mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
SCOPE GROUP
ADVICE:
This group’s adjustment has no effect, if the optional DMU2000 Data Management Unit is not connected.
132 SCP 1.8 FIX
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 160 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 1800kHz ~ 1999kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 1800kHz
127 RDSP VPKT SLP
133 SCP 3.5 FIX
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the PKT mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 80 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 3500kHz ~ 3999kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 3500kHz
128 RDSP VRTY SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the RTTY mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
129 RDSP VRTY SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the RTTY mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
130 RDSP VSSB SHP
Function: Selects the passband characteristics of the DSP
filter for the SSB mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: SOFT / SHARP
Default Setting: SHARP
SOFT: Primary importance is attached to the phase
of the filter factor.
SHARP: Primary importance is attached to the amplitude of the filter factor.
134 SCP 5.0 FIX
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 60 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 5250kHz ~ 5499kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 5250kHz
135 SCP 7.0 FIX
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 40 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 7000kHz ~ 7299kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 7000kHz
136 SCP 10.1 FIX
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 30 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 10100kHz ~ 10149 kHz (1 kHz steps)
Default Setting: 10100kHz
131 RDSP VSSB SLP
Function: Selects the shape factor of the DSP filter for
the SSB mode on the 50 MHz band.
Available Values: STEEP / MEDIUM / GENTLE
Default Setting: MEDIUM
Page 132
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
SCOPE GROUP
TUNING GROUP
137 SCP 14.0 FIX
143 TUN DIAL STP
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 20 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 14000kHz ~ 14349kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 14000kHz
Function: Setting of the Tuning Dial knob’s tuning speed
except the FM and FM-PKT modes.
Available Values: 1Hz / 5Hz / 10Hz
Default Setting: 10Hz
138 SCP 18.0 FIX
Function: Enabling/disabling of the “Fine” tuning speed
in the CW, RTTY, and PKT-SSB modes.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
ENABLE: Tuning in 1 Hz steps on the CW, RTTY,
and PKT-SSB modes.
DISABLE: Tuning according to the steps determined
via menu item “142 TUN DIAL STP”.
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 17 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 18000kHz ~ 18199kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 18068kHz
139 SCP 21.0 FIX
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 15 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 21000kHz ~ 21449kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 21000kHz
140 SCP 24.8 FIX
144 TUN CW FINE
145 TUN MHz SEL
Function: Selects the tuning steps of the [(DOWN)] /
[(UP)] key.
Available Values: 1MHz / 100kHz
Default Setting: 100kHz
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 12 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 24800kHz ~ 24989kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 24890kHz
146 TUN AM STEP
141 SCP 28.0 FIX
147 TUN FM STEP
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 10 m amateur
band.
Available Values: 28000kHz ~ 29699kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 28000kHz
Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
[UP]/[DWN] keys in the FM and FM-PKT modes.
Available Values: 5kHz / 6.25kHz / 10kHz / 12.5kHz /
20kHz / 25kHz
Default Setting: 5kHz
142 SCP 50.0 FIX
148 TUN AM D.LCK
Function: Selects the scan start frequency of the FIX mode
Spectrum Scope while monitoring on the 6 m amateur band.
Available Values: 50000kHz ~ 53999kHz (1 kHz/step)
Default Setting: 50000kHz
Function: Select whether the Main Tuning Dial knob and
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob shall be “Enabled” or “Disabled”
on the AM mode.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
Function: Selects the tuning steps for the microphone’s
[UP]/[DWN] keys in the AM mode.
Available Values: 2.5kHz / 5kHz / 9kHz / 10kHz / 12.5 kHz
Default Setting: 5kHz
149 TUN FM D.LCK
Function: Select whether the Main Tuning Dial knob and
[CLAR(VFO-B)] knob shall be “Enabled” or “Disabled”
on the FM mode.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
150 TUN FM DIAL
Function: Setting of the Tuning Dial knob’s tuning speed
in the FM mode.
Available Values: 10Hz / 100Hz
Default Setting: 100Hz
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 133
MENU MODE
TUNING GROUP
TX AUDIO GROUP
151 TUN MY BAND
152 TAUD EQ1 FRQ
Function: Programs a band to be skipped while selecting
bands using the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob.
Available Values: 1.8M ~ 50M / GEN / T14M / T28M /
T50M
Default Setting: 1.8M ~ 50M / GEN: ON,
T14M / T28M / T50M: OFF
To program the band to be skipped, rotate the ( VFOB)[SELECT] knob to recall the band to be skipped while
selecting bands via the [CLAR(VFO-B)] knob, then press
the [ENT] key (one of the [BAND] buttons) to change this
setting to “OFF”. Repeat the same procedures to cancel the
setting (change the “OFF” notation to “ON”).
Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range
for the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 700Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are
set to factory defaults (flat).
100Hz ~ 700Hz: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700
Hz. You may adjust the equalizer
gain and Q-factor at this selected
audio frequency via menu items
“152 TAUD EQ1 LVL” and “153
TAUD EQ1 BW”.
153 TAUD EQ1 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of
the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 5
154 TAUD EQ1 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
155 TAUD EQ2 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle
range for the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 1500Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are
set to factory defaults (flat).
700Hz ~ 1500Hz: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~
1500 Hz. You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q-factor at this selected audio frequency via menu
items “155 TAUD EQ2 LVL” and
“156 TAUD EQ2 BW”.
156 TAUD EQ2 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range
of the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 5
157 TAUD EQ2 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of
the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
Page 134
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
TX AUDIO GROUP
158 TAUD EQ3 FRQ
164 TAUD PE2 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range
for the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: OFF / 1500Hz ~ 3200Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: OFF
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor
are set to factory defaults (flat).
1500Hz ~ 3200Hz: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~
3200 Hz. You may adjust the
equalizer gain and Q-factor in this
selected audio frequency via menu
items “158 TAUD EQ3 LVL” and
“159 TAUD EQ3 BW”.
Function: Selects the center frequency of the middle range
for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
processor is activated.
Available Values: OFF / 700Hz ~ 1500Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 800Hz
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are
set to factory defaults (flat).
700Hz ~ 1500Hz: Center frequencies of 700 Hz ~
1500 Hz. You may adjust the equalizer gain and Q-factor at this selected audio frequency via menu
items “164 TAUD PE2 LVL” and
“165 TAUD PE2 BW”.
159 TAUD EQ3 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of
the parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 5
160 TAUD EQ3 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the
parametric microphone equalizer.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 10
161 TAUD PE1 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the lower range
for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
processor is activated.
Available Values: OFF / 100Hz ~ 700Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 200Hz
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor are
set to factory defaults (flat).
100Hz ~ 700Hz: Center frequencies of 100 Hz ~ 700
Hz. You may adjust the equalizer
gain and Q-factor at this selected
audio frequency via menu items “161
TAUD PE1 LVL” and “162 TAUD
PE1 BW”.
162 TAUD PE1 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the low range of
the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech processor is activated.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 0
163 TAUD PE1 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the low range of the
parametric microphone equalizer when the speech processor is activated.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 2
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
165 TAUD PE2 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the middle range
of the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
processor is activated.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 0
166 TAUD PE2 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the middle range of the
parametric microphone equalizer when the speech processor is activated.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 1
167 TAUD PE3 FRQ
Function: Selects the center frequency of the high range
for the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech
processor is activated.
Available Values: OFF / 1500Hz ~ 3200Hz (100 Hz/step)
Default Setting: 2100Hz
OFF:
The equalizer gain and Q-factor
are set to factory defaults (flat).
1500Hz ~ 3200Hz: Center frequencies of 1500 Hz ~
3200 Hz. You may adjust the
equalizer gain and Q-factor in this
selected audio frequency via menu
items “167 TAUD PE3 LVL” and
“168 TAUD PE3 BW”.
168 TAUD PE3 LVL
Function: Adjusts the equalizer gain of the high range of
the parametric microphone equalizer when the speech processor is activated.
Available Values: –20 ~ 10
Default Setting: 0
169 TAUD PE3 BW
Function: Adjusts the Q-factor of the high range of the
parametric microphone equalizer when the speech processor is activated.
Available Values: 1 ~ 10
Default Setting: 1
Page 135
MENU MODE
TX GNRL GROUP
170 TGEN BIAS
175 TGEN VOX SEL
Function: Adjusts the Bias level of the Final Amplifier
while in “Class-A” operation.
Available Values: 1 ~ 100
Default Setting: 100
Function: Selects the audio input source for triggering TX
during VOX operation.
Available Values: MIC / DATA
Default Setting: MIC
MIC: The VOX function will be activated by microphone audio input.
DATA: The VOX function will be activated by data
audio input.
171 TGEN MAX PWR
Function: Selects a maximum output power limit.
Available Values: 20W / 50W / 100W / 200W
Default Setting: 200W
172 TGEN PWR CTRL
Function: Configures the [RF PWR] knob.
Available Values: ALL MODE / CARRIER
Default Setting: ALL MODE
ALL MODE: The [RF PWR] knob is enabled on all
modes.
CARRIER: The [RF PWR] knob is enabled in all
modes except SSB. In this configuration,
the SSB output power will be set to
maximum, regardless of the [RF PWR]
knob’s position.
173 TGEN ETX-GND
Function: Enables/Disables the TX GND jack on the rear
panel.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
174 TGEN TUN PWR
Function: Selects a maximum output power limit for driving the input circuit of an external linear RF amplifier while
tuning (while using the Remote Control function of the
linear RF amplifier).
Available Values: 20W / 50W / 100W / 200W
Default Setting: 100W
Page 136
176 TGEN ANTI VOX
Function: Adjusts the Anti-VOX Trip Gain, which is the
level of negative AF feedback of receiver audio to the
microphone, to prevent receiver audio from activating the
transmitter (via the microphone) during VOX operation.
Available Values: 1 ~ 100
Default Setting: 50
177 TGEN EMRGNCY
Function: Enables Tx/Rx operation on the Alaska Emergency Channel, 5167.5 kHz.
Available Values: DISABLE / ENABLE
Default Setting: DISABLE
When this Menu Item is set to “ENABLE”, the spot frequency of 5167.5 kHz will be enabled. The Alaska Emergency Channel will be found between the Memory channels “P-1” and “01 (or 1-01)”.
IMPORTANT:
The use of this frequency is restricted to stations operating in or near Alaska, and only for emergency purposes
(never for routine operations). See §97.401(c) of the FCC’s
regulations for details.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
MENU MODE
NOTE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 137
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Rx Frequency Range:
Tx Frequency Ranges:
Frequency Stability:
Operating Temperature Range:
Emission Modes:
Frequency Steps:
Antenna Impedance:
Power Consumption:
(@117 VAC)
Supply Voltage:
Dimensions (WxHxD):
Weight (approx.):
30 kHz - 60 MHz (operating)
1.8 - 29.7 MHz, 50 - 54 MHz (specified performance, Amateur bands only)
1.8 - 29.7 MHz, 50 - 54 MHz (Amateur bands only)
5.16750MHz, 5.33200MHz, 5.34800MHz,
5.36800MHz, 5.37300MHz, 5.40500MHz (USA version only)
135.7 - 137.8kHz, 5.26000MHz, 5.28000MHz, 5.29000 MHz,
5.36800MHz, 5.37300MHz, 5.40000MHz, 5.40500MHz (UK version only)
±0.05 ppm (MP version, after 1 minute @+14 °F ~ +140 °F [–10 °C ~ +60 °C])
±0.5 ppm (after 1 minute @+14 °F ~ +140 °F [–10 °C ~ +60 °C])
+14 °F ~ +140 °F (–10 °C ~ +60 °C)
A1A (CW), A3E (AM), J3E (LSB, USB), F3E (FM),
F1B (RTTY), F1D (PACKET), F2D (PACKET)
1/5/10 Hz (SSB,CW, & AM), 100 Hz (FM)
50 Ohms, unbalanced
16.7 - 150 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 1.8 - 29.7 MHz Amateur bands)
25 - 100 Ohms, unbalanced (Tuner ON, 50 MHz Amateur band)
Rx (no signal)
70 VA
Rx (signal present)
80 VA
Tx (200 W)
720 VA
AC 100 - 240 V (±10 %)
18.2” x 5.3” x 15.3” (462 x 135 x 389 mm) w/o knob and connector
46.3 lbs (21 kg)
TRANSMITTER
Power Output:
Modulation Types:
Maximum FM Deviation:
Harmonic Radiation:
SSB Carrier Suppression:
Undesired Sideband Suppression:
Audio Response (SSB):
3rd-order IMD:
Bandwidth:
Microphone Impedance:
Page 138
10 - 200 watts (CW, LSB, USB, FM, RTTY, PKT)
5 - 50 watts (AM carrier)
10 - 75 watts (Class A: LSB, USB)
+10 dBm (135.7 - 137.8kHz: TRV Jack, CW, UK version only)
J3E (SSB): Balanced,
A3E (AM): Low-Level (Early Stage)
F3E (FM): Variable Reactance
±5.0 kHz/±2.5 kHz
Better than –60 dB (1.8 - 50 MHz Amateur bands)
At least 60 dB below peak output
At least 60 dB below peak output
Not more than –6 dB from 300 to 2700 Hz
–31 dB @14 MHz, 200 watts PEP
–40 dB @14 MHz, Class A: 75 watts PEP
500 Hz (CW)
3.0 kHz (LSB, USB)
6.0 kHz (AM)
16 kHz (FM)
600 Ohms (200 to 10 k Ohms)
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS
RECEIVER
Circuit Type:
Intermediate Frequencies:
Sensitivity:
Squelch Sensitivity (AMP2):
Selectivity (–6/–60 dB):
Image Rejection:
Maximum Audio Output:
Audio Output Impedance:
Conducted Radiation:
VFO-A; Double-conversion superheterodyne
VFO-B; Triple-conversion superheterodyne
VFO-A; 9 MHz /30 kHz (24 kHz for AM/FM)
VFO-B; 40.455 MHz/455 kHz /30 kHz (24 kHz for AM/FM)
SSB (2.4 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N)
2 μV (0.5 - 1.8 MHz, IPO1)
0.2 μV (1.8 - 30 MHz, AMP2)
0.125 μV (50 - 54 MHz, AMP2)
AM (6 kHz, 10 dB S+N/N, 30 % modulation @400 Hz)
6 μV (0.5 - 1.8 MHz, IPO1)
2 μV (1.8 - 30 MHz, AMP2)
1 μV (50 - 54 MHz, AMP2)
FM (BW: 15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
0.5 μV (28 - 30 MHz, AMP2)
0.35 μV (50 - 54 MHz, AMP2)
There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed.
SSB/CW/AM
2 μV (0.1 - 30 MHz)
2 μV (50 - 54 MHz)
FM
1 μV (28 - 30 MHz)
1 μV (50 - 54 MHz)
There is no specification in frequency ranges not listed.
Mode
–6 dB
–60 dB
CW
0.5 kHz or better
750 Hz or less
LSB, USB
2.4 kHz or better
3.6 kHz or less
AM
6 kHz or better
15 kHz or less
FM
12 kHz or better
30 kHz or less
70 dB or better (1.8 - 29.7 MHz Amateur bands, VRF: ON)
60 dB or better (50 MHz Amateur band)
2.5 W into 4 Ohms with 10% THD
4 to 8 Ohms (4 Ohms: nominal)
Less than 4000 μμW (–47 dBm < 1000 MHz, –57 dBm > 1000 MHz)
: Except the 9 MHz.
Specifications are subject to change, in the interest of technical improvement, without notice or obligation, and are
guaranteed only within the amateur bands.
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 139
INSTALLATION OF THE OPTIONAL ROOFING FILTER (XF-126CN)
1. Turn the front panel [POWER] switch “off,” then turn
the rear panel’s [POWER] switch “off.”
2. Disconnect all the cables from the transceiver.
3. Referring to Figure 1, remove the three screws from
each side of the transceiver and four screws from the
top of the transceiver, then remove the top cover.
4. Refer to Figure 2, there is the metal plate on the right
side of the transceiver. A mounting position of the optional filter is inside of this. Remove the three screws
affixing the metal plate, then remove the metal plate.
5. Refer to Figure 3, position the filter so that its connectors are aligned with the mounting pins on the board,
and push it into place.
6. Replace the metal plate and its three screws.
7. Replace the top cover and its ten screws.
8. Filter installation is now complete.
9. Connect the all cables to the transceiver.




FIGURE 1



FIGURE 2
FIGURE 3
Page 140
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
NOTE
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Page 141
INDEX
A
E
A Switch ....................................................................... 22
AB Switch ........................................................... 24, 83
AB Switch ............................................................... 24,
AM Switch ....................................................... 24, 102
Accessory ....................................................................... 4
AF GAIN Knob ..................................................... 21, 38
AFSK Operation ........................................................ 113
AGC Switch ........................................................... 19, 67
Alaska Emergency Frequency ................................... 106
All Reset ........................................................................ 7
AM Operation .............................................................. 70
APF .................................................................. 27, 29, 92
ATT Switch ............................................................ 18, 52
ATU ............................................................................. 72
Audio Peak Filter ............................................. 27, 29, 92
Audio Playback ............................................................ 45
Automatic Antenna Tuner ............................................ 72
Electronic Keyer .......................................................... 88
Erasing Memory ........................................................ 103
B
B Switch ...................................................................... 22
Band Stack ................................................................... 47
Basic Operation ........................................................... 37
Beacon ......................................................................... 95
BK-IN Switch .................................................. 25, 86, 88
C
Clarifier ........................................................................ 40
Class-A Operation ........................................................ 78
Connector Pinout ......................................................... 15
CONT Switch .................................................. 27, 29, 58
Contest Memory Keyer ................................................ 94
Contest Number ........................................................... 97
CONTOUR .................................................................. 58
Custom Switch ............................................................. 47
CW Delay Time ........................................................... 93
CW Operation .............................................................. 86
CW Pitch ...................................................................... 93
CW Reverse ................................................................. 92
CW Spotting ................................................................ 91
D
Digital Noise Reduction .............................................. 64
Digital Notch Filter ...................................................... 64
DIM Switch ............................................................. 6, 41
DNF Switch ..................................................... 28, 29, 64
DNR Switch ..................................................... 28, 29, 64
Dual Receive ................................................................ 42
Page 142
F
FCC Notice ................................................................ 144
FM Operation .............................................................. 98
Full Break-in .......................................................... 87, 89
Full Reset ....................................................................... 7
I
IF SHIFT ......................................................... 27, 28, 60
Installation ..................................................................... 8
Installation of Option ................................................. 140
Intercept Point Optimization ................................. 18, 51
IPO Switch ............................................................. 18, 51
K
KEYER Switch ...................................................... 25, 88
Keyer Weight Ratio ..................................................... 90
L
LOCK Switch ........................................................ 23, 41
M
MA Switch ........................................................ 24, 104
Memory Check .......................................................... 103
Memory Group .......................................................... 105
Memory Recall .......................................................... 102
Memory Reset ................................................................ 7
Memory Scan ............................................................. 108
Memory Storage ........................................................ 102
Memory Tune ............................................................ 104
Menu Mode ............................................................... 116
Menu Reset .................................................................... 7
Message Memory ......................................................... 94
METER Knob .............................................................. 19
MIC ........................................................................ 20, 70
MONI Knob ........................................................... 19, 81
MONI Switch ......................................................... 17, 81
Moving Memory ........................................................ 104
MOX Switch ................................................................ 17
Mute ............................................................................. 69
My Band ...................................................................... 46
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
INDEX
N
S
NAR Switch ........................................................... 29, 65
NARROW ................................................................... 65
NB Knob ................................................................ 19, 66
NB Switch .............................................................. 25, 66
Noise Blanker ........................................................ 25, 66
NOTCH Filter .................................................. 28, 29, 63
Scan ........................................................................... 107
Semi Break-in .............................................................. 87
SHIFT Switch .................................................. 27, 28, 60
Sloped AGC ................................................................. 68
Specification .............................................................. 138
Speech Processor ......................................................... 76
Split Operation ............................................................. 82
SQL ........................................................................ 19, 39
SSB Operation ............................................................. 70
SSB Transmit Bandwidth ............................................ 77
STO Switch .......................................................... 22, 101
SUB DISPLAY ................................................ 25, 26, 28
O
Option ............................................................................ 4
P
P.BACK ....................................................................... 45
Packet Operation ....................................................... 110
Parametric Microphone Equalizer ............................... 74
Plug Pinout .................................................................. 15
PMS ........................................................................... 109
POWER Switch ..................................................... 16, 38
PROC Knob ........................................................... 19, 76
PROC Switch ......................................................... 17, 76
Programmable Memory Scan .................................... 109
PSK Operation ........................................................... 112
T
Text Memory ............................................................... 96
TUNE Switch ........................................................ 17, 72
TX Clarifier ................................................................. 82
TXW Switch .......................................................... 23, 83
V
QMB .................................................................... 22, 101
Quick Memory Bank ................................................. 101
Quick Split ................................................................... 85
V/M Switch .......................................................... 24, 101
VFO Scan .................................................................. 107
VFO Tracking Feature ................................................. 83
Voice Memory ............................................................. 80
VOX Switch ........................................................... 17, 81
VRF Switch ..................................................... 27, 28, 54
R
W
Q
RCL Switch .......................................................... 22, 101
Repeater Operation ...................................................... 99
Reset .............................................................................. 7
RF GAIN Knob ..................................................... 21, 53
RF PWR Knob ....................................................... 20, 71
Roofing Filter ........................................................ 18, 56
Rotator Control ............................................................ 48
RTTY Operation ........................................................ 111
RX ANT ................................................................. 17, 39
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
WIDTH Switch ................................................ 28, 29, 61
Page 143
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:




Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1. Changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by YAESU MUSEN could void the user’s
authorization to operate this device.
2. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
3. The scanning receiver in this equipment is incapable of tuning, or readily being altered, by the User to operate
within the frequency bands allocated to the Domestic public Cellular Telecommunications Service in Part 22.
DECLARATION BY MANUFACTURER
The scanner receiver is not a digital scanner and is incapable of being converted or modified to a digital scanner
receiver by any user.
WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE SIGNALS IS
PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND FEDERAL LAW.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Page 144
FTDX5000 OPERATING MANUAL
Declaration of Conformity
We, YAESU UK LTD. declare under our sole responsibility that the following equipment complies
with the essential requirements of the Directive 1999/5/EC and 2011/65/EU.
Type of Equipment:
Brand Name:
Model Number:
Manufacturer:
Address of Manufacturer:
HF Transceiver
YAESU
FT DX 5000, FT DX 5000D, FT DX 5000MP
Yaesu Musen Co., Ltd.
Tennozu Parkside Building, 2-5-8 Higashi-Shinagawa,
Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, 140-0002, Japan
Applicable Standards:
This equipment is tested and conforms to the essential requirements of directive, as included in
following standards.
Radio Standard:
EMC Standard:
Safety Standard:
EN 301 783-02 V1.2.1
RoHS2 Standard:
EN 50581: 2012
EN 301 489-01 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-15 V1.2.1
EN 60950-1: 2006 + A12:2011
The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedures is kept at the
following address:
Company:
Address:
YAESU UK LTD.
Unit 12, Sun Valley Business Park, Winnall Close
Winchester, Hampshire, SO23 0LB, U.K.
Attention in case of use
This transceiver works on frequencies which are not generally permitted.
As for the actual usage, the user has to possess an amateur radio licence.
Usage is allowed only in the frequency bands which are allocated for amateur
radios.
AT
DK
GR
LU
RO
LI
List of national codes
BE BG CY CZ
ES
EE
FI
FR
HR HU
IE
IT
LV
MT NL
PL
SK
SI
SE CH
NO
–
–
–
Disposal of your Electronic and Electric Equipment
Products with the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household waste.
Electronic and Electric Equipment should be recycled at a facility capable of handling these items
and their waste byproducts.
In EU countries, please contact your local equipment supplier representative or service center for
information about the waste collection system in your country.
DE
GB
LT
PT
IS
–
Copyright 2013
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
All rights reserved
No portion of this manual
may be reproduced without
the permission of
YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.
Printed in Japan.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement